ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ

ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Leicestershire, UK
LE11 3TU
+44 (0)1509 222222
ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ

Programme Specifications

Programme Specification

IS MSc Information Management and Business Technology (2017 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Information Management and Business Technology
Programme code BSPT07/08
Length of programme This programme is available by full-time or part-time study. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is one calendar year full-time; the minimum period of study for the award of PGDip is nine months full-time; the minimum period of study for the award of PGCert is one semester full-time. Part-time study requires completion within the following times: MSc – 8 years, PGDip – 5 years, PGCert – 3 years.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Part Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • Acquire critical technological and analytical skills appropriate to effective workplace performance in the implementation and leadership of information management and business technology initiatives;
  • Develop a critical understanding of the role and significance of both being an information technology specialist and a business generalist;
  • Complete a self-directed and managed piece of research exploring the relationship of information management and business technologies;
  • Develop a critical understanding of the ongoing impacts of both information management and business technology perspectives on the workplace;
  • Enhance employment skills, with particular reference to employment in positions where knowledge of and skills in information management and business technology are essential. 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for:

          Librarianship, information, knowledge, records and archives management (2014)

  • The Response of The Library Association to the Institute for Learning and Teaching The National Framework for Higher Education Teaching ()
  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ, Learning and Teaching Strategy

()

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ School of Business and Economics, Learning and Teaching Strategy
  • Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland
  • Annual and Periodic Programme Review
  • External Examiners' reports
  • Staff-Student committees 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

  • the principles and practice of information and business technology management
  • the relationship between traditionally technology-independent areas of an organisation and non-technical business areas

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
  • Appreciate the range of methods used to manage the relationship between traditionally technology-independent areas of an organisation and non-technical business areas
  • Understand, by applying appropriate theory, practices and tools for the specification, design and implementation of information systems
  • Understand, by applying technical and managerial concepts, theories and evidence to analyse business information and knowledge networks within organisations
  • Understand information and knowledge management policies and strategies that enhance effectiveness in organisations
  • Successfully complete an original piece of research on information management and business technology dovetailing both theoretical rigour and solid analysis 
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
  • Critically evaluate and select management tools and techniques for a given project
  • Successfully model the requirements of information systems using appropriate modelling tools
  • Manage and assess user requirements for collaborative technologies using a range of qualitative methods
  • Successfully apply a systems approach to problem structuring and problem solving within a business enterprise framework
  • Manage the process of identifying and documenting risks associated with the development process and with target systems
c. Key transferable skills:
  • Communication skills: writing, dissemination and media skills
  • Oral presentation skills for seminars, workshops and conferences
  • Research management and time management skills
  • Bibliographic and computing skills
  • Decision-making ability in complex and unpredictable situations
  • Independent learning ability required for continuing professional development.

4. Programme structure

To be eligible for consideration for these awards, students must have studied the following modules:

Semester One    

All compulsory modules

ISP485

Collaborative Working withTechnology

15

ISP486

Information Architecture

15

ISP488

Management of IT Systems

15

ISP490

Business Relationships Management

15

Semester Two     

All compulsory modules  

ISP483

Project Management and Leadership

15

ISP484

Information and Social Network Analysis

15

ISP489

Managing Knowledge in Organisations

15

ISP491

Business Technologies and Platforms

15

ISP700/701

Dissertation (full or part-time)

60

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XXI  for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any module other than ISP700 or ISP701 to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

IS MSc Information Management and Business Technology (2018 Entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Information Management and Business Technology
Programme code BSPT07/08
Length of programme This programme is available by full-time or part-time study. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is one calendar year full-time; the minimum period of study for the award of PGDip is nine months full-time; the minimum period of study for the award of PGCert is one semester full-time. Part-time study requires completion within the following times: MSc – 8 years, PGDip – 5 years, PGCert – 3 years.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Part Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • Critically assess technological and analytical skills appropriate to effective workplace performance in the implementation and leadership of information management and business technology initiatives;
  • Develop a critical understanding of the role and significance of both being an information technology specialist and a business generalist;
  • Complete a self-directed and managed piece of research exploring the relationship of information management and business technologies;
  • Develop a critical understanding of the ongoing impacts of both information management and business technology perspectives on the workplace;
  • Enhance employment skills, with particular reference to employment in positions where knowledge of and skills in information management and business technology are essential. 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for:

          Librarianship, information, knowledge, records and archives management (2014)

  • The Response of The Library Association to the Institute for Learning and Teaching The National Framework for Higher Education Teaching ()
  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ, Learning and Teaching Strategy

()

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ School of Business and Economics, Learning and Teaching Strategy
  • Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland
  • Annual and Periodic Programme Review
  • External Examiners' reports
  • Staff-Student committees 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • the principles and practice of information and business technology management
  • the relationship between traditionally technology-independent areas of an organisation and non-technical business areas

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On sucessful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • Critically evaluate the range of methods used to manage the relationship between traditionally technology-independent areas of an organisation and non-technical business areas
  • Understand, by applying appropriate theory, practices and tools for the specification, design and implementation of information systems
  • Understand, by applying technical and managerial concepts, theories and evidence to analyse business information and knowledge networks within organisations
  • Understand information and knowledge management policies and strategies that enhance effectiveness in organisations
  • Successfully complete an original piece of research on information management and business technology dovetailing both theoretical rigour and solid analysis 
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • Critically evaluate and select management tools and techniques for a given project
  • Successfully model the requirements of information systems using appropriate modelling tools
  • Manage and assess user requirements for collaborative technologies using a range of qualitative methods
  • Successfully apply a systems approach to problem structuring and problem solving within a business enterprise framework
  • Manage the process of identifying and documenting risks associated with the development process and with target systems
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • Communication skills: writing, dissemination and media skills
  • Oral presentation skills for seminars, workshops and conferences
  • Research management and time management skills
  • Bibliographic and computing skills
  • Decision-making ability in complex and unpredictable situations
  • Independent learning ability required for continuing professional development.

4. Programme structure

To be eligible for consideration for these awards, students must have studied the following modules:

Semester One    

All compulsory modules

ISP485

Collaborative Working with Technology

15

ISP486

Information Architecture

15

ISP488

IT Services Management

15

ISP490

Business Relationships Management

15

Semester Two     

All compulsory modules  

ISP483

Leadership and Project Management

15

ISP489

Knowledge Management Strategies

15

ISP491

Business Models and New Technologies

15

ISP492

Data Science

15

ISP700/701

Dissertation (full or part-time)

60

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XXI  for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any module other than ISP700 or ISP701 to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Finance/ MSc Finance and Investment/ MSc Corporate Finance 2018 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Finance/ Finance and Investment/ Corporate Finance
Programme code BSPT28 MSc Corporate Finance, BSPT29 MSc Finance, BSPT27 MSc Finance and Investment
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MSc Corporate Finance - 
MSc Finance - 
MSc Finance and Investment - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To provide a programme informed by current developments in finance, which is practically relevant.
  • To develop a comprehensive understanding of finance theory and its application.
  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work effectively and to contribute to business and society

For MSc Finance

  • To provide graduates with appropriate tools of analysis to critically evaluate complex financial issues both systematically and creatively, to improve financial practice.

For MSc Finance and Investment

  • To provide graduates with appropriate tools of analysis to critically evaluate complex investment issues both systematically and creatively, to improve the practice of risk measurement and investment management.

For MSc Corporate Finance

  • To provide graduates with appropriate tools of analysis to critically evaluate complex corporate financial issues both systematically and creatively, to improve corporate treasury management practice.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA Framework for Higher Education Qualifications, Master’s Degrees

  • QAA Finance Subject Benchmark Statement

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ “Building Excellence” Strategy Document

  • School of Business and Economics Strategic Plan

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

For MSc Finance

K1  appraise the core theories of finance and assess the empirical evidence on these

K2  critically discuss the financing arrangements and governance structures of business entities

K3  evaluate the factors influencing investment behaviour

K4  demonstrate a critical awareness of how financial markets operate in different settings

K5  debate the role of finance in society and the wider economy

For MSc Finance and Investment

K1-5

K6  debate and critically assess complex investment issues including risk measurement and investment management.

For MSc Corporate Finance

K1-5

K7 debate and critically assess complex corporate finance issues in corporate treasury management and executive financial decision making.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1  analyse and solve theoretical and practical problems in finance

C2  synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in finance

For MSc Finance

C3  critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to finance

For MSc Finance and Investment

C4  critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to investment practice.

For MSc Corporate Finance

C5 critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to the practice of treasury management.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1  prepare reports suitable for a professional audience

P2  collect and analyse relevant financial data using appropriate techniques

P3  use appropriate analytical and professional tools in complex financial scenarios

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

 T1  critically analyse and evaluate complex topics

T2  formulate key arguments from an extensive range of evidence

T3  demonstrate advanced skills in numeracy ( Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques)

T4  apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations

T5  use advanced information technology (e.g. handling of large data sets, multifaceted information retrieval and spread-sheet methods)

T6  demonstrate effective personal organisation including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision-making and written and oral communication

T7  use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management

4. Programme structure

4.1   MSc Finance

Module Structure

Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 105)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP420

Methods for Financial Data Analysis

15

1

BSP421

Principles of Finance

15

1

BSP422

Financial Markets and Institutions

15

1

BSP423

Financial Reporting and Company Performance

15

1

BSP424

Corporate Finance

15

2

BSP425

Portfolio Management

15

2

BSP429

Business Communication for Finance

15

1 & 2

 

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose Five optional Modules (total modular weight 75). Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 2 and chosen from List A  below.   Three optional Modules (total modular weight 45) will be taken in Semester 3 and chosen from List B.

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

List A

BSP426

International Financial Management

15

2

BSP427

Financial Statements and Business Valuation

15

2

BSP428

Derivatives and Risk Management

15

2

BSP430

Global Financial Markets and the Financial Crisis

15

2

BSP024

Business Economics

15

2

BSP041

Small Business and Entrepreneurship

15

2

List B

BSP431

Corporate Financial Analysis

15

3

BSP432

Global Investment Analysis

15

3

BSP433

Advanced Corporate Finance

15

3

BSP434

Corporate Governance and Responsibility

15

3

BSP435

Financial Trading

15

3

BSP436

Financial Market Project

15

3

 

4.2    MSc Finance and Investment

 

Module Structure

Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 120)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP420

Methods for Financial Data Analysis

15

1

BSP421

Principles of Finance

15

1

BSP422

Financial Markets and Institutions

15

1

BSP423

Financial Reporting and Company Performance

15

1

BSP425

Portfolio Management

15

2

BSP427

Financial Statements and Business Valuation

15

2

BSP428

Derivatives and Risk Management

15

2

BSP429

Business Communication for Finance

15

1 & 2

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose FOUR optional Modules, (total modular weight 60).  One module (Semester 2) to be selected from List A, 3 modules (Semester 3) to be selected from List B below. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

LIST A

 

 

BSP424

Corporate Finance

15

BSP426

International Financial Management

15

BSP430

Global Financial Markets and the Financial Crisis

15

BSP024

Business Economics

15

ECP256

Applied Financial Econometrics

15

LIST B

   
BSP432 Global Investment Analysis       15
BSP434 Corporate Governance and Responsibility       15
BSP435 Financial Trading       15
BSP436 Financial Market Project       15

 

 

4.3 MSc Corporate Finance

 Module Structure

 Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP420

Methods for Financial Data Analysis

15

1

BSP421

Principles of Finance

15

1

BSP422

Financial Markets and Institutions

15

1

BSP423

Financial Reporting and Company Performance

15

1

BSP424

Corporate Finance

15

2

BSP426

International Financial Management

15

2

BSP427

Financial Statements and Business Valuation

15

2

BSP429

Business Communication for Finance

15

1 & 2

BSP431

Corporate Financial Analysis

15

3

BSP433

Advanced Corporate Finance

15

3

BSP434

Corporate Governance and Responsibility

15

3

Semester 2 Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose One optional Module, (total modular weight 15) to be chosen from the list below. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

BSP425

Portfolio Management

15

BSP430

Global Financial Markets and the Financial Crisis

15

BSP024

Business Economics

15

BSP041

Small Business and Entrepreneurship

15

 4.4 The School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.

4.5 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

4.6 Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulsory module may be authorised by the Programme  Director to undertake an alternative module, provided the ILOs of the programme are still met.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

 

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.   

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period. Students may choose to be re-assessed in Semester 3 modules in January of the next academic year.

5.3 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Work Psychology 2017 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Work Psychology
Programme code BSPT39 (f/t) BSPT36 (p/t)
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Part Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This MSc programme has a core philosophy of developing students’ knowledge base of theories, principles and practices within work psychology domains. Teaching is designed to develop students’ ability to synthesise and apply this knowledge to complex, multifaceted or ill-defined problems and to develop their ability to communicate with multiple stakeholder groups. Teaching is informed by the forefront of research, theory and practice in work psychology (and where appropriate integrated with other related disciplines).  Learning outcomes will underpin subsequent training, career routes / choices and work performance. The programme offers academically rigorous knowledge and skills development that prepares students for Doctoral pathways/research, for the British Psychological Society Stage 2 Qualification in Occupational Psychology (and subsequent registration with the Health and Care Professions Council), and for entry into both specialist work roles and management posts.  The programme balances relevant academic theory and research with the advanced application of research methods and applied practices/professional issues in work psychology domains. 

The MSc programme in Work Psychology aims: 

  • To develop an in-depth specialist understanding of theory, research and practice in work psychology
  • To encourage critical and reflective analysis of theory, research and practice in work psychology through the consideration of a wide range of work-related issues in diverse work contexts and cultures
  • To develop in students the ability to synthesise theory and research and to apply it into practice as practitioners in order to prepare students to offer valuable expertise when dealing with a variety of work-related issues
  • To foster a high-level understanding of the scientific, ethical and practical issues associated with the development and application of theory in work psychology through the consideration of multiple stakeholder perspectives
  • To prepare students who are intending to pursue a professional qualification in occupational psychology (potentially leading to full membership and Chartered Status with the BPS Division of Occupational Psychology) and/or a PhD, and those wishing to apply their learning in work organisations without following this qualification pathway.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA descriptors for Higher Education Qualification at Level 7 (2008)

  • British Psychological Society Standards for Masters Programmes in Occupational Psychology (2013; and revised draft, 2014)

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ and School of Business and Economics Strategy Documents

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy

  • Masters programmes within the School of Business and Economics

  • Health and Care Professions Council Standards of Proficiency – Practitioner Psychologists (2010)

  • European Master on Work and Organizational Psychology WOP-P (content and learning outcomes)

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

K1        key theories and contemporary practices relating to the assessment of individuals’ knowledge, skills, abilities, goals and other constructs in various work-related contexts and cultures

K2        important and influential research-based theories of career and personal development including the application of a range of psychological theories to individual- and group-level learning, development and knowledge management

K3        the essential features of leadership theories including the implications of these for the identification and development of leaders and the management of a range of work issues

K4        approaches to measuring and managing work performance, employee motivation, and employee participation

K5        the measurement and determinants of work-related attitudes, health and well-being, linked to an understanding of the processes and outcomes of various organisational change interventions

K6        the psychological influences on employees’ responses to different types of work, different work environments, work cultures and different management practices

K7        the development, implementation and evaluation of theory-based problem-solving processes in work-related contexts based on an understanding of key scientist practitioner skills and advanced quantitative and qualitative research methods

K8        professional codes of conduct including BPS Code of Conduct, HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics, and other relevant ethical principles and guidelines

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1       Critically evaluate knowledge, theory and practice from work psychology and relevant related disciplines

C2       Apply their knowledge and understanding to critically evaluate, synthesise and reflect upon professional and ethical issues raised in both research and practice in work psychology

C3       Apply key theoretical principles to a range of work-related problems and issues in a variety of different work settings

C4       Build strategies for the assessment of work-related issues through psychological enquiry and to critically evaluate the suitability of different strategies for the implementation and evaluation of interventions

C5       Use their understanding of psychological theories and concepts to communicate effectively about all aspects of their work to a range of different stakeholder groups

C6       Integrate, evaluate and apply their knowledge of the topics diversity, fairness, gender and culture across the whole of the curriculum

C7       Reflect upon the development of knowledge and skills relevant to their progression as an occupational psychologist

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1        Identify and apply a variety of assessment methods to gather evidence relating to work-related issues and problems across a range of different domains within work psychology and across all parts of the problem-solving cycle

P2        Make appropriate evidence-based and ethical choices about the suitability of a range of practical theory-based techniques used in work psychology

P3        Use, when appropriate, a range of practical skills commonly deployed by work psychologists (e.g. interviewing techniques, critical incidents, repertory grid, questionnaire design etc.)

P4        Critically and reflectively analyse various sources of evidence and identify both new and established implications for practice

P5        Identify areas of practice and work-related issues that could benefit from research; design, conduct and evaluate an appropriate investigation

P6        Integrate different activities across the problem-solving cycle (e.g. problem assessment, intervention design and evaluation of solutions) in an appropriate and ethical way

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1        Communicate effectively orally, electronically and in writing to a wide range of different stakeholder groups and in a number of different formats

T2        Apply constructive and structured approaches to complex problem-solving and intervention evaluation even in the face of uncertainties and incomplete information

T3        Manage personal learning efficiently and effectively through an appreciation of the skills and capabilities needed to apply psychology effectively in work settings

T4        Use IT effectively as a learning and communication tool

T5        Develop and utilise the advanced research skills needed to work with complex data and research / practical agendas

T6        Work effectively and confidently both as an individual and as part of a small team within constrained time-frames

T7        Work independently in a way that stimulates continued professional development by using the available support strategically and effectively

4. Programme structure

The course consists of eight 15-credit modules and one 60-credit research project.  

Code

Title

Modular Weight

Exam Weight

BSP404

Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (S1, S2)

15

0

BSP400

Leadership and Performance Management (S1)

15

0

BSP401

Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice (S1)

15

0

BSP402

Well-being and Work (S1)

15

0

BSP403

Work Design, Organisational Change and Development (S1)

15

0

BSP405

Psychological Assessment in Organisations (S2)

15

0

BSP406

Career Development (S2)

15

0

BSP407

Learning, Development and Knowledge Management (S2)

15

0

BSP408

Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology

60

0

 Students who wish to study part-time will be guided by their personal tutor as to the sequencing and timing of modules, taking into account module pre-requisites and the students’ existing expertise and availability for study. In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. Students may not submit for assessment their Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology until they have completed all other taught modules on the programme.  Students registered on this programme must commence the module Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (BSP404) before all other modules.  For those studying on a part-time basis, at least one of Modules BSP400, BSP401, BSP402 or BSP403 must be studied before BSP405, BSP406 or BSP407.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Work Psychology 2018 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Work Psychology
Programme code BSPT39 (f/t) BSPT36 (p/t)
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Part Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This MSc programme has a core philosophy of developing students’ knowledge base of theories, principles and practices within work psychology domains. Teaching is designed to develop students’ ability to synthesise and apply this knowledge to complex, multifaceted or ill-defined problems and to develop their ability to communicate with multiple stakeholder groups. Teaching is informed by the forefront of research, theory and practice in work psychology (and where appropriate integrated with other related disciplines).  Learning outcomes will underpin subsequent training, career routes / choices and work performance. The programme offers academically rigorous knowledge and skills development that prepares students for Doctoral pathways/research, for the British Psychological Society Stage 2 Qualification in Occupational Psychology (and subsequent registration with the Health and Care Professions Council), and for entry into both specialist work roles and management posts.  The programme balances relevant academic theory and research with the advanced application of research methods and applied practices/professional issues in work psychology domains. 

The MSc programme in Work Psychology aims: 

  • To develop an in-depth specialist understanding of theory, research and practice in work psychology
  • To encourage critical and reflective analysis of theory, research and practice in work psychology through the consideration of a wide range of work-related issues in diverse work contexts and cultures
  • To develop in students the ability to synthesise theory and research and to apply it into practice as practitioners in order to prepare students to offer valuable expertise when dealing with a variety of work-related issues
  • To foster a high-level understanding of the scientific, ethical and practical issues associated with the development and application of theory in work psychology through the consideration of multiple stakeholder perspectives
  • To prepare students who are intending to pursue a professional qualification in occupational psychology (potentially leading to full membership and Chartered Status with the BPS Division of Occupational Psychology) and/or a PhD, and those wishing to apply their learning in work organisations without following this qualification pathway.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA descriptors for Higher Education Qualification at Level 7 (2008)

  • British Psychological Society Standards for Masters Programmes in Occupational Psychology (2013; and revised draft, 2014)

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ and School of Business and Economics Strategy Documents

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy

  • Masters programmes within the School of Business and Economics

  • Health and Care Professions Council Standards of Proficiency – Practitioner Psychologists (2010)

  • European Master on Work and Organizational Psychology WOP-P (content and learning outcomes)

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

K1        key theories and contemporary practices relating to the assessment of individuals’ knowledge, skills, abilities, goals and other constructs in various work-related contexts and cultures

K2        important and influential research-based theories of career and personal development including the application of a range of psychological theories to individual- and group-level learning, development and knowledge management

K3        the essential features of leadership theories including the implications of these for the identification and development of leaders and the management of a range of work issues

K4        approaches to measuring and managing work performance, employee motivation, and employee participation

K5        the measurement and determinants of work-related attitudes, health and well-being, linked to an understanding of the processes and outcomes of various organisational change interventions

K6        the psychological influences on employees’ responses to different types of work, different work environments, work cultures and different management practices

K7        the development, implementation and evaluation of theory-based problem-solving processes in work-related contexts based on an understanding of key scientist practitioner skills and advanced quantitative and qualitative research methods

K8        professional codes of conduct including BPS Code of Conduct, HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics, and other relevant ethical principles and guidelines

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1       Critically evaluate knowledge, theory and practice from work psychology and relevant related disciplines

C2       Apply their knowledge and understanding to critically evaluate, synthesise and reflect upon professional and ethical issues raised in both research and practice in work psychology

C3       Apply key theoretical principles to a range of work-related problems and issues in a variety of different work settings

C4       Build strategies for the assessment of work-related issues through psychological enquiry and to critically evaluate the suitability of different strategies for the implementation and evaluation of interventions

C5       Use their understanding of psychological theories and concepts to communicate effectively about all aspects of their work to a range of different stakeholder groups

C6       Integrate, evaluate and apply their knowledge of the topics diversity, fairness, gender and culture across the whole of the curriculum

C7       Reflect upon the development of knowledge and skills relevant to their progression as an occupational psychologist

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1        Identify and apply a variety of assessment methods to gather evidence relating to work-related issues and problems across a range of different domains within work psychology and across all parts of the problem-solving cycle

P2        Make appropriate evidence-based and ethical choices about the suitability of a range of practical theory-based techniques used in work psychology

P3        Use, when appropriate, a range of practical skills commonly deployed by work psychologists (e.g. interviewing techniques, critical incidents, repertory grid, questionnaire design etc.)

P4        Critically and reflectively analyse various sources of evidence and identify both new and established implications for practice

P5        Identify areas of practice and work-related issues that could benefit from research; design, conduct and evaluate an appropriate investigation

P6        Integrate different activities across the problem-solving cycle (e.g. problem assessment, intervention design and evaluation of solutions) in an appropriate and ethical way

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1        Communicate effectively orally, electronically and in writing to a wide range of different stakeholder groups and in a number of different formats

T2        Apply constructive and structured approaches to complex problem-solving and intervention evaluation even in the face of uncertainties and incomplete information

T3        Manage personal learning efficiently and effectively through an appreciation of the skills and capabilities needed to apply psychology effectively in work settings

T4        Use IT effectively as a learning and communication tool

T5        Develop and utilise the advanced research skills needed to work with complex data and research / practical agendas

T6        Work effectively and confidently both as an individual and as part of a small team within constrained time-frames

T7        Work independently in a way that stimulates continued professional development by using the available support strategically and effectively

4. Programme structure

The course consists of eight 15-credit modules and one 60-credit research project.  

Code

Title

Modular Weight

Exam Weight

BSP404

Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (S1, S2)

15

0

BSP400

Leadership and Performance Management (S1)

15

0

BSP401

Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice (S1)

15

0

BSP402

Well-being and Work (S1)

15

0

BSP403

Work Design, Organisational Change and Development (S1)

15

0

BSP405

Psychological Assessment in Organisations (S2)

15

0

BSP406

Career Development (S2)

15

0

BSP407

Learning, Development and Knowledge Management (S2)

15

0

BSP408

Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology

60

0

 Students who wish to study part-time will be guided by their personal tutor as to the sequencing and timing of modules, taking into account module pre-requisites and the students’ existing expertise and availability for study. In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award of MSc Work Psychology, candidates must:

i) satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI and:

ii) achieve a total of 180 credits with all module marks at 50% or higher.

Students fulfilling (i) but not (ii) will be eligible for the award of MSc Psychology Applied to the Workplace

Students may not submit for assessment their Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology until they have completed all other taught modules on the programme.  Students registered on this programme must commence the module Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (BSP404) before all other modules.  For those studying on a part-time basis, at least one of Modules BSP400, BSP401, BSP402 or BSP403 must be studied before BSP405, BSP406 or BSP407.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Business Psychology 2017 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Business Psychology
Programme code BSPT38 (f/t) BSPT35 (p/t)
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Part Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This MSc programme has a core philosophy of developing students’ knowledge base of theories, principles and practices within business psychology domains. Teaching is designed to develop students’ ability to synthesise and apply this knowledge to complex, multifaceted or ill-defined problems and to develop their ability to communicate with multiple stakeholder groups. Teaching is informed by the forefront of research, theory and practice in work psychology (and where appropriate integrated with other related disciplines).  Learning outcomes will underpin subsequent training, career routes / choices and work performance. The programme offers academically rigorous knowledge and skills development that prepares students for Doctoral pathways/research, and for entry into both specialist work roles and management posts. Graduates of the programme who complete all core modules and the Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology may progress to training for the British Psychological Society Stage 2 Qualification in Occupational Psychology and subsequent registration with the Health and Care Professions Council. However, to follow this pathway a BPS-accredited undergraduate-level conversion course in Psychology will need to be completed either before or after the MSc. 

The MSc programme in Business Psychology aims: 

  • To develop an in-depth specialist understanding of theory, research and practice in business psychology
  • To encourage critical and reflective analysis of theory, research and practice in business psychology through the consideration of a wide range of work-related issues in diverse work contexts and cultures
  • To develop in students the ability to synthesise theory and research and to apply it into practice as practitioners in order to prepare students to offer valuable expertise when dealing with a variety of work-related issues
  • To foster a high-level understanding of the scientific, ethical and practical issues associated with the development and application of theory in business psychology through the consideration of multiple stakeholder perspectives
  • To prepare students who may wish to pursue a professional qualification in occupational psychology (potentially leading to full membership and Chartered Status with the BPS Division of Occupational Psychology) and/or a PhD, and those wishing to apply their learning in work organisations without following these qualification pathways.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA descriptors for Higher Education Qualification at Level 7 (2008)

  • British Psychological Society Standards for Masters Programmes in Occupational Psychology (2013; and revised draft, 2014)

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ and School of Business and Economics Strategy Documents

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy

  • Masters programmes within the School of Business and Economics

  • Health and Care Professions Council Standards of Proficiency – Practitioner Psychologists (2010)

  • European Master on Work and Organizational Psychology WOP-P (content and learning outcomes)

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas: 

K1        key theories and contemporary practices relating to the assessment of individuals’ knowledge, skills, abilities, goals and other constructs in various work-related contexts and cultures 

K2        important and influential research-based theories of career and personal development including the application of a range of psychological theories to individual- and group-level learning, development and knowledge management 

K3        the essential features of leadership theories including the implications of these for the identification and development of leaders and the management of a range of work issues 

K4        approaches to measuring and managing work performance, employee motivation, and employee participation  

K5        the measurement and determinants of work-related attitudes, health and well-being, linked to an understanding of the processes and outcomes of various organisational change interventions  

K6        the psychological influences on employees’ responses to different types of work, different work environments, work cultures and different management practices  

K7        the development, implementation and evaluation of theory-based problem-solving processes in work-related contexts based on an understanding of key scientist practitioner skills and advanced quantitative and qualitative research methods 

K8        professional codes of conduct including BPS Code of Conduct, HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics, and other relevant ethical principles and guidelines

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1       Critically evaluate knowledge, theory and practice from business psychology and relevant related disciplines

C2       Apply their knowledge and understanding to critically evaluate, synthesise and reflect upon professional and ethical issues raised in both research and practice in business psychology

C3       Apply key theoretical principles to a range of work-related problems and issues in a variety of different work settings

C4       Build strategies for the assessment of work-related issues through psychological enquiry and to critically evaluate the suitability of different strategies for the implementation and evaluation of interventions

C5       Use their understanding of psychological theories and concepts to communicate effectively about all aspects of their work to a range of different stakeholder groups

C6       Integrate, evaluate and apply their knowledge of the topics diversity, fairness, gender and culture across the whole of the curriculum

C7       Reflect upon the development of knowledge and skills relevant to their progression as a business psychologist

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1        Identify and apply a variety of assessment methods to gather evidence relating to work-related issues and problems across a range of different domains within business psychology and across all parts of the problem-solving cycle

P2        Make appropriate evidence-based and ethical choices about the suitability of a range of practical theory-based techniques used in business psychology

P3        Use, when appropriate, a range of practical skills commonly deployed by business psychologists (e.g. interviewing techniques, critical incidents, repertory grid, questionnaire design etc.)

P4        Critically and reflectively analyse various sources of evidence and identify both new and established implications for practice

P5        Identify areas of practice and work-related issues that could benefit from research; design, conduct and evaluate an appropriate investigation

P6        Integrate different activities across the problem-solving cycle (e.g. problem assessment, intervention design and evaluation of solutions) in an appropriate and ethical way

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1        Communicate effectively orally, electronically and in writing to a wide range of different stakeholder groups and in a number of different formats 

T2        Apply constructive and structured approaches to complex problem-solving and intervention evaluation even in the face of uncertainties and incomplete information 

T3        Manage personal learning efficiently and effectively through an appreciation of the skills and capabilities needed to apply psychology effectively in work settings 

T4        Use IT effectively as a learning and communication tool 

T5        Develop and utilise the advanced research skills needed to work with complex data and research / practical agendas 

T6        Work effectively and confidently both as an individual and as part of a small team within constrained time-frames

T7        Work independently in a way that stimulates continued professional development by using the available support strategically and effectively

4. Programme structure

The course consists of eight 15-credit modules and one 60-credit research project. Students may elect to complete either the Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology (BSP408) OR the Dissertation in Business Psychology (BSP409). Only those completing BSP408 (and all other core modules) are eligible to progress towards stage 2 training (after a conversion course).  

Code

Title

Modular Weight

Exam Weight

BSP404

Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (S1, S2)

15

0

BSP400

Leadership and Performance Management (S1)

15

0

BSP401

Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice (S1)

15

0

BSP402

Well-being and Work (S1)

15

0

BSP403

Work Design, Organisational Change and Development (S1)

15

0

BSP405

Psychological Assessment in Organisations (S2)

15

0

BSP406

Career Development (S2)

15

0

BSP407

Learning, Development and Knowledge Management (S2)

15

0

BSP408

Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology (S3: Option)

60

0

BSP409

Dissertation in Business Psychology (S3: Option)

60

0

 

Students who wish to study part-time will be guided by their personal tutor as to the sequencing and timing of modules, taking into account module pre-requisites and the students’ existing expertise and availability for study. In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

 

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. Students may not submit for assessment their Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology or Dissertation in Business Psychology until they have completed all other taught modules on the programme.  Students registered on this programme must commence the module Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (BSP404) before all other modules. For those studying on a part-time basis, at least one of Modules BSP400, BSP401, BSP402 or BSP403 must be studied before BSP405, BSP406 or BSP407.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Business Psychology 2018 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Business Psychology
Programme code BSPT38 (f/t) BSPT35 (p/t)
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Part Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

This MSc programme has a core philosophy of developing students’ knowledge base of theories, principles and practices within business psychology domains. Teaching is designed to develop students’ ability to synthesise and apply this knowledge to complex, multifaceted or ill-defined problems and to develop their ability to communicate with multiple stakeholder groups. Teaching is informed by the forefront of research, theory and practice in work psychology (and where appropriate integrated with other related disciplines).  Learning outcomes will underpin subsequent training, career routes / choices and work performance. The programme offers academically rigorous knowledge and skills development that prepares students for Doctoral pathways/research, and for entry into both specialist work roles and management posts. Graduates of the programme who complete all core modules and the Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology may progress to training for the British Psychological Society Stage 2 Qualification in Occupational Psychology and subsequent registration with the Health and Care Professions Council. However, to follow this pathway a BPS-accredited undergraduate-level conversion course in Psychology will need to be completed either before or after the MSc. 

The MSc programme in Business Psychology aims: 

  • To develop an in-depth specialist understanding of theory, research and practice in business psychology
  • To encourage critical and reflective analysis of theory, research and practice in business psychology through the consideration of a wide range of work-related issues in diverse work contexts and cultures
  • To develop in students the ability to synthesise theory and research and to apply it into practice as practitioners in order to prepare students to offer valuable expertise when dealing with a variety of work-related issues
  • To foster a high-level understanding of the scientific, ethical and practical issues associated with the development and application of theory in business psychology through the consideration of multiple stakeholder perspectives
  • To prepare students who may wish to pursue a professional qualification in occupational psychology (potentially leading to full membership and Chartered Status with the BPS Division of Occupational Psychology) and/or a PhD, and those wishing to apply their learning in work organisations without following these qualification pathways.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA descriptors for Higher Education Qualification at Level 7 (2008)

  • British Psychological Society Standards for Masters Programmes in Occupational Psychology (2013; and revised draft, 2014)

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ and School of Business and Economics Strategy Documents

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy

  • Masters programmes within the School of Business and Economics

  • Health and Care Professions Council Standards of Proficiency – Practitioner Psychologists (2010)

  • European Master on Work and Organizational Psychology WOP-P (content and learning outcomes)

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas: 

K1        key theories and contemporary practices relating to the assessment of individuals’ knowledge, skills, abilities, goals and other constructs in various work-related contexts and cultures 

K2        important and influential research-based theories of career and personal development including the application of a range of psychological theories to individual- and group-level learning, development and knowledge management 

K3        the essential features of leadership theories including the implications of these for the identification and development of leaders and the management of a range of work issues 

K4        approaches to measuring and managing work performance, employee motivation, and employee participation  

K5        the measurement and determinants of work-related attitudes, health and well-being, linked to an understanding of the processes and outcomes of various organisational change interventions  

K6        the psychological influences on employees’ responses to different types of work, different work environments, work cultures and different management practices  

K7        the development, implementation and evaluation of theory-based problem-solving processes in work-related contexts based on an understanding of key scientist practitioner skills and advanced quantitative and qualitative research methods 

K8        professional codes of conduct including BPS Code of Conduct, HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics, and other relevant ethical principles and guidelines

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1       Critically evaluate knowledge, theory and practice from business psychology and relevant related disciplines

C2       Apply their knowledge and understanding to critically evaluate, synthesise and reflect upon professional and ethical issues raised in both research and practice in business psychology

C3       Apply key theoretical principles to a range of work-related problems and issues in a variety of different work settings

C4       Build strategies for the assessment of work-related issues through psychological enquiry and to critically evaluate the suitability of different strategies for the implementation and evaluation of interventions

C5       Use their understanding of psychological theories and concepts to communicate effectively about all aspects of their work to a range of different stakeholder groups

C6       Integrate, evaluate and apply their knowledge of the topics diversity, fairness, gender and culture across the whole of the curriculum

C7       Reflect upon the development of knowledge and skills relevant to their progression as a business psychologist

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1        Identify and apply a variety of assessment methods to gather evidence relating to work-related issues and problems across a range of different domains within business psychology and across all parts of the problem-solving cycle

P2        Make appropriate evidence-based and ethical choices about the suitability of a range of practical theory-based techniques used in business psychology

P3        Use, when appropriate, a range of practical skills commonly deployed by business psychologists (e.g. interviewing techniques, critical incidents, repertory grid, questionnaire design etc.)

P4        Critically and reflectively analyse various sources of evidence and identify both new and established implications for practice

P5        Identify areas of practice and work-related issues that could benefit from research; design, conduct and evaluate an appropriate investigation

P6        Integrate different activities across the problem-solving cycle (e.g. problem assessment, intervention design and evaluation of solutions) in an appropriate and ethical way

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1        Communicate effectively orally, electronically and in writing to a wide range of different stakeholder groups and in a number of different formats 

T2        Apply constructive and structured approaches to complex problem-solving and intervention evaluation even in the face of uncertainties and incomplete information 

T3        Manage personal learning efficiently and effectively through an appreciation of the skills and capabilities needed to apply psychology effectively in work settings 

T4        Use IT effectively as a learning and communication tool 

T5        Develop and utilise the advanced research skills needed to work with complex data and research / practical agendas 

T6        Work effectively and confidently both as an individual and as part of a small team within constrained time-frames

T7        Work independently in a way that stimulates continued professional development by using the available support strategically and effectively

4. Programme structure

The course consists of eight 15-credit modules and one 60-credit research project. Students may elect to complete either the Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology (BSP408) OR the Dissertation in Business Psychology (BSP409). Only those completing BSP408 (and all other core modules) are eligible to progress towards stage 2 training (after a conversion course).  

Code

Title

Modular Weight

Exam Weight

BSP404

Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (S1, S2)

15

0

BSP400

Leadership and Performance Management (S1)

15

0

BSP401

Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice (S1)

15

0

BSP402

Well-being and Work (S1)

15

0

BSP403

Work Design, Organisational Change and Development (S1)

15

0

BSP405

Psychological Assessment in Organisations (S2)

15

0

BSP406

Career Development (S2)

15

0

BSP407

Learning, Development and Knowledge Management (S2)

15

0

BSP408

Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology (S3: Option)

60

0

BSP409

Dissertation in Business Psychology (S3: Option)

60

0

 

Students who wish to study part-time will be guided by their personal tutor as to the sequencing and timing of modules, taking into account module pre-requisites and the students’ existing expertise and availability for study. In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

 

In order to be eligible for the award of MSc Business Psychology, candidates must:

i) Satisfy the requirements of Regualtion XXI and

ii) Achieve a total of 180 credits with all module marks at 50% or higher.

Students fulfilling (i) but not (ii) will be eligible for the award of MSc Psychology Applied to the Workplace.

Students may not submit for assessment their Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology or Dissertation in Business Psychology until they have completed all other taught modules on the programme.  Students registered on this programme must commence the module Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (BSP404) before all other modules. For those studying on a part-time basis, at least one of Modules BSP400, BSP401, BSP402 or BSP403 must be studied before BSP405, BSP406 or BSP407.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Human Resource Management/Employment Relations and Human Resource Management (2017 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Human Resource Management/Employment Relations and Human Resource Management
Programme code BSPT18/BSPT19
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MSc Human Resource Management - 

MSc Employment Relations and Human Resource Management - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

Programme Aims:

 

  • To provide market led programmes informed by the latest research and developments in the fields of HR and employment relations.

 

  • To foster in graduates the capacity for reflective practice, and professional and personal development so that they are able to contribute effectively to the leadership and management of business, organisations and society.

 

  • To provide graduates with advanced understanding of the social science theory and evidence that underpins people management practice, allowing students to meet the knowledge requirements for chartered membership of the Chartered Institute for Personnel and Development.

 

For Msc HRM

 

  • To develop graduates with the capacity to undertake advanced analyse and critically evaluation of contemporary issues in the field of HR and people management.

 

For Msc Employment Relations

 

  • To develop graduates with the capacity to undertake advanced analyse and critically evaluation of contemporary issues related to the regulation and management of the employment relationship.

 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA Framework for Higher Education Qualifications, Masters Degrees

  • QAA subject benchmark for Masters degrees in business and management

  • CIPD advanced level qualification module content summaries

  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ “Building Excellence” Strategy Document

  • School of Business and Economics Strategic Plan

 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of the programmes, students should be able to:

 

MSc HRM:

 

  • Critically appraise key theories of leadership, motivation, commitment, engagement and change management in relation to people management and the related empirical evidence.

 

  • Critically discuss the role of the human resource management function in organisational life, including the role of context and environment in shaping this.

  • Debate and synthesise the ethical issues involved in people management.

  •  Demonstrate advanced understanding of the key skills required for a successful career as an HR practitioner.

  • Demonstrate a critical understanding of philosophies and methods of social science research as they pertain to the fields of HR and employment relations.

MSc in Employment Relations and HRM:

  • Critically appraise key theories of leadership, motivation, commitment, engagement and change management in relation to people management and the related empirical evidence.

 

  • Critically discuss the role of the human resource management function in organisational life, including the role of context and environment in shaping this.

  • Debate and synthesise the ethical issues involved in people management.

  •  Demonstrate advanced understanding of the key skills required for a successful career as an HR practitioner.

  • Demonstrate a critical understanding of philosophies and methods of social science research as they pertain to the fields of HR and employment relations.

  •  Critically appraise key theories of the employment relationship and related empirical evidence.

  • Demonstrate a critical understanding of the principles and practical application of UK employment law.

 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Analyse and offer solutions to people management problems and issues.

  • Synthesise issues and themes from the professional and academic literatures on people management.

For MSc HRM

  • Critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to HRM practice.

For MSc in Employment Relations and HRM

  • Critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to the regulation of the employment relationship.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Presenting information for a business audience in a concise and coherent manner.

  • Interpret and work with financial data and information.

  • Demonstrate the foundation skills for professional competence in key HR activities, including interviewing, negotiation, project management, leadership and the delivery of training.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

 

  • Critically analyse and evaluate complex topics

 

  • Formulate arguments from an extensive range of theory and evidence.

 

  • Demonstrate effective personal organisation, including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision making, and written and oral communication.

 

  • Use effective team working skills including leadership, team building and project management.

 

  • Apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations.

 

  • Demonstrate the capacity to reflect critically on own practice and update skills and knowledge through CPD.

4. Programme structure

MSc HRM

MSc Employment Relations and HRM

Semester 1

BSP450 HRM: Theory and Practice

BSP451 Developing Skills for Business Leadership

 

Choice of two of:

BSP455 Employment Relations OR

BSP402 Wellbeing and Work

 

BSP400 Leadership and Performance Management*

BSP401 Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice*

BSP403 Work Design, Organisational Change and Development*

 

BSP450 HRM: Theory and Practice

BSP451 Developing Skills for Business Leadership

BSP455 Employment Relations

 

Choice of one of:

BSP400 Leadership and Performance Management*

BSP401 Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice*

BSP403 Work Design, Organisational Change and Development*

 

Semester 2

BSP452 Strategic HRM

BSP453 Research Methods for HRM

 

Choice of two of:

BSP454 Employment Law* OR
 
BSP405 Psychological Developement in Organisations

 

BSP407 Learning, Development and Knowledge  Management*

BSP406 Career Development

 

BSP452 Strategic HRM

BSP453 Research Methods for HRM

BSP454 Employment Law

 

Choice of one of:

BSP407 Learning, Development and Knowledge  Management*

BSP406 Career Development

 

Summer

BSP456 HRM Dissertation (60 credits)

BSP457 Employment Relations Dissertation (60 credits)

All modules are 15 credits unless otherwise stated.

Students on the MSc HRM must take at least two of the modules marked with *

Students on the MSc ER and HRM must take at least one of the modules marked with *

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

 

5.2 Students seeking CIPD accrediatation must also obtain marks of not less than 50 for the following CIPD mapped modules:

 

BSP450 HRM: Theory and Practice;

BSP451 Developing Skills for Business Leadership;

BSP452 Strategic HRM;

BSP456 or BSP457 Dissertation

 

and in at least two of:

 

BSP455 Employment Relations

BSP401 Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice

BSP403 Work Design, Organisational Change and Development

BSP407 Learning, Development and Knowledge Management

 

5.3 Candidates who have a right to re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.

 

5.4 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

The percentage mark for each module will be combined in a credit-weighted average to determine the final percentage mark.

Programme Specification

BS MSc Human Resource Management/Employment Relations and Human Resource Management (2018 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Human Resource Management/Employment Relations and Human Resource Management
Programme code BSPT18/BSPT19
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MSc Human Resource Management - 

MSc Employment Relations and Human Resource Management - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

Programme Aims:

 

  • To provide internationally relevant market led programmes informed by the latest research and developments in the fields of global HR and employment relations.

 

  • To foster in graduates the capacity for reflective practice, and professional and personal development so that they are able to contribute effectively to the leadership and management of business, organisations and society.

 

  • To provide graduates with advanced understanding of the social science theory and evidence that underpins people management practice, allowing students to meet the knowledge requirements for chartered membership of the Chartered Institute for Personnel and Development.

 

For Msc HRM

 

  • To develop graduates with the capacity to undertake advanced analysis and critical evaluation of contemporary issues in the field of global Human Resources Management and People Management.

 

For Msc Employment Relations

 

  • To develop graduates with the capacity to undertake advanced analysis and critical evaluation of contemporary national and international issues related to the regulation and management of the employment relationship.

 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • QAA Framework for Higher Education Qualifications, Masters Degrees

  • QAA subject benchmark for Masters degrees in business and management

  • CIPD advanced level qualification module content summaries
  • EQUIS standards and criteria
  • AACSB Accreditiation Standards
  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ “Building Excellence” Strategy Document

  • School of Business and Economics Strategic Plan

 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of the programmes, students should be able to:

 

MSc HRM:

 

  • Critically appraise key theories of leadership, motivation, commitment, engagement and change management in relation to people management and the related empirical evidence.

 

  • Critically discuss the role of the human resource management function in organisational life, including the role of national and international context and environment in shaping this.

  • Debate and synthesise the ethical issues involved in people management.

  •  Demonstrate advanced understanding of the key skills required for a successful career as an HR practitioner.

  • Demonstrate a critical understanding of philosophies and methods of social science research as they pertain to the fields of HR and employment relations.

MSc in Employment Relations and HRM:

  • Critically appraise key theories of leadership, motivation, commitment, engagement and change management in relation to people management and the related empirical evidence.

 

  • Critically discuss the role of the human resource management function in organisational life, including the role of national and international context and environment in shaping this.

  • Debate and synthesise the ethical issues involved in people management.

  •  Demonstrate advanced understanding of the key skills required for a successful career as an HR practitioner.

  • Demonstrate a critical understanding of philosophies and methods of social science research as they pertain to the fields of HR and employment relations.

  •  Critically appraise key theories of the employment relationship and related empirical evidence.

  • Demonstrate a critical understanding of the principles and practical application of UK employment law.

 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Analyse and offer solutions to people management problems and issues.

  • Synthesise issues and themes from the professional and academic literatures on people management.

For MSc HRM

  • Critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to HRM practice.

For MSc in Employment Relations and HRM

  • Critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to the regulation of the employment relationship.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Presenting information for a business audience in a concise and coherent manner.

  • Interpret and work with financial data and information.

  • Demonstrate the foundation skills for professional competence in key HR activities, including interviewing, negotiation, project management, leadership and the delivery of training.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

 

  • Critically analyse and evaluate complex topics

 

  • Formulate arguments from an extensive range of theory and evidence.

 

  • Demonstrate effective personal organisation, including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision making, and written and oral communication.

 

  • Use effective team working skills including leadership, team building and project management.

 

  • Apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations.

 

  • Demonstrate the capacity to reflect critically on own practice and update skills and knowledge through CPD.

4. Programme structure

MSc HRM

MSc Employment Relations and HRM

Semester 1

BSP450 HRM: Theory and Practice

BSP451 Developing Skills for Business Leadership

 

Choice of two of:

BSP455 Employment Relations  

BSP400 Leadership and Performance Management*

BSP403 Work Design, Organisational Change and Development*

 

BSP450 HRM: Theory and Practice

BSP451 Developing Skills for Business Leadership

BSP455 Employment Relations

 

Choice of one of:

BSP400 Leadership and Performance Management*

BSP403 Work Design, Organisational Change and Development*

 

Semester 2

BSP452 Strategic HRM

BSP453 Research Methods for HRM

 

Choice of two of:

BSP454 Employment Law
 
 

BSP407 Learning, Development and Knowledge  Management

BSP406 Career Development

 

BSP452 Strategic HRM

BSP453 Research Methods for HRM

BSP454 Employment Law

 

Choice of one of:

BSP407 Learning, Development and Knowledge  Management

BSP406 Career Development

 

Summer

BSP456 HRM Dissertation (60 credits)

BSP457 Employment Relations Dissertation (60 credits)

All modules are 15 credits unless otherwise stated.

Students seeking CIPD accreditiation must choose options from modules marked * and must take BSP407 and BSP454

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

 

5.2 Students seeking CIPD accrediatation must also obtain marks of not less than 50 for the following CIPD mapped modules:

 

BSP407 Learning, Development and Knowledge Management

BSP450 HRM: Theory and Practice;

BSP451 Developing Skills for Business Leadership

BSP452 Strategic HRM;

BSP453 Research Methods for HRM

BSP454 Employment Law

BSP456 or BSP457 Dissertation

 

and in at least two of:

 

BSP455 Employment Relations

BSP400 Leadership and Performance Management

BSP403 Work Design, Organisational Change and Development

 

 

5.3 Candidates who have a right to re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.

 

5.4 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

The percentage mark for each module will be combined in a credit-weighted average to determine the final percentage mark.

Programme Specification

BS MSc Business Analytics Consulting

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip
Programme title Business Analytics Consulting
Programme code BSPT37
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months (i.e. completed programme taught element plus project). For the award of PGDip is nine calendar months (i.e. completed programme taught element).
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To equip students with a broad range of knowledge and analytics methodologies, techniques and tools to enable them to work effectively in supporting problem-solving and decision-making in a business or policy context;

  • To build students’ analytics consulting skills in a number of areas within business and government (e.g.  marketing, operations, policy);

  • To enable students to exploit the opportunities offered by the availability of ‘big data’ within and between organisations (e.g. managing big data, leading analytics initiatives);

  • To produce graduates with the ability to use rigorous quantitative and qualitative model-supported analyses to help tackle complex problem or decision situations within organisations; 

  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development in preparation for a professional career in analytics within business and government, or as preparation for further research in the field of analytics;

  • To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme  through close links with many analytics experts or users in business and government, and with a taught content and practical experience that enable students to identify opportunities for the deployment of analytics in practice.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The QAA benchmark statement for Master's awards in business and management.

  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.

  • University Learning and Teaching Strategy.

  • Teaching and learning policies of the School of Business and Economics.

  • The increasing take-up of analytics within business and government.

  • The research interests and specialisms of the School of Business and Economics academic staff and their professional involvement in their disciplines.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas: 

K1        The main business or policy application areas in industry, and of current and leading edge research in these areas.

K2        A range of analytics approaches, techniques and tools for analysing big data, together with their expected benefits and limitations.

K3        Current thinking and issues relevant to big data.

K4        The role of the analytics professional and the process of deploying effective analytics projects in organisations.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

 

C1       Construct original analytics-driven insights that draw on appropriate evidence from a variety of sources.

C2       Critically analyse, evaluate, and synthetize the practice of analytics.

C3       Critically appraise the relative importance and relevance of different sources of data to the deployment of analytics, and recognise and address issues relevant to management of big data.

C4       Recognise opportunities to apply a wide range of analytics approaches in organisations, deployed effectively and critically in either expert or facilitative modes, to a wide range of problem and decision situations.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1        Apply model-supported problem structuring and decision analysis skills to formulate complex or unstructured problem or decision situations, distinguish facts from values, define objectives, preferences, constraints and assumptions, and create and evaluate options.

P2        Make effective use of information and communication technologies, including the appropriate selection and competent application of a range of relevant computer software for deploying analytics.

P3      Conduct research effectively and efficiently into the field of analytics, using a variety of data, information and knowledge sources.

P4        Undertake, and manage effectively, an analytics-driven project in a problem or decision situation within a business or policy context, selecting and employing various methodologies, techniques and tools as appropriate, and developing helpful interactions with analytics users or experts

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1        Communicate complex ideas and arguments effectively, both orally and in writing and using a range of media, to expert and lay audiences.

T2        Work effectively with others in a team environment, recognising and utilising individuals’ contributions in group processes, and displaying effective negotiation and project management skills when needed.  

T3:       Demonstrate high personal effectiveness, including critical self-awareness, self-reflection and self-management, sensitivity to diversity in people and situations, time management, and the ability to take responsibility for their own learning, and to continue learning through reflection on practice and experience.

T4:       Use information technology to scan, organise and assess relevant information for problem solving, decision making and sharing knowledge.

T5:       Analyse complex problems and develop novel solutions, and apply numerical reasoning appropriately in problem solving processes. 

Learning outcomes associated with the PGDip do not include K4, C4, P4 and T5.,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4. Programme structure

The MSc programme lasts one-year full-time, and is divided into a taught and project component. Students take 8 compulsory taught modules delivered across two semesters, which amount to 120 credits. In the summer students take a supervised analytics consulting or research project worth 60 credits. 

 

Code

Title

Modular weight

Semester

BSP410

Skills for Analytics Projects

15

1

BSP411

Discovery Analytics

15

1

BSP412

Decision Analytics

15

1

BSP413

Managing Big Data

15

1

BSP414

Customer Analytics

15

2

BSP415

Operations Analytics

15

2

BSP416

Policy and Strategy Analytics

15

2

BSP417

Process and Programming for Analytics

15

2

BSP418

Analytics Project

60

3

 

The PGDip is awarded after successful completion of all eight 15-credit taught modules.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. In addition, and in accordance with Regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MBA/ MBA with Internship (2016 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Association of MBAs (AMBA)

Final award MBA/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Business Administration/Business Administration with Internship
Programme code BSPT20, BSPT22,BSPT24
Length of programme The ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ MBA programme is offered on a full-time and a part-time basis. The programme commences in October of each academic year. The period of study for the award of MBA is twelve calendar months when studied as a full-time programme and twenty-four to thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme. The period of study for the MBA with Internship is 24 calendar months inclusive of the Internship.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MBA Full time: 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Attract sufficient richly experienced managers from a wide range of educational, business and commercial backgrounds to create a positive learning environment for all participants.
  • Provide such managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of general intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management.
  • Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities internationally, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations.
  • Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing employment within the business, commercial and public sectors, and through an emphasis in all subjects onmanagerial relevance.
  • Develop highly trained and adaptable managers who are able to meet the management and professional needs of organisations that are facing the challenges of the future.
  • Develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
  • Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas
  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines
  • Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines
  • School of Business and Economics ('The School') Mission Statement of General Aims for Postgraduate Programmes
  • The University Academic Quality Procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • the contexts and processes in which enterprsie and innovation are able to thrive and prosper - including managerial style, organisational culture and stakeholder expectations.

 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business contextincluding word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
  • effectively engage with organisations adopting new approaches to managing enterprise and produce a group consultancy repoort on an orgnaisational strategic initiative. 

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Content

Code

Module title

Modular weight

Semester

Core/Option FT pathway

Core/Option PT pathway

BSP301

Marketing

10

1

C

         C

BSP302

Accounting and Performance Manangement

10

1

C

C

BSP313

Problem Solving for Leaders

10

1

C

         C

BSP304

Business Economics

10

1

C

C

BSP317

Leading Strategic Change

20

1

C

O

BSP319

Business Administration Project

 30 

1- 3

C

C

BSP322

Work Based Learning Project and Research Methods

30

1-3

 C

N/A

BSP306

Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services

10

1

O

O

BSP300

Business Analytics

10

2

C

C

BSP308

Corporate Finance

10

2

C

O

BSP303

Management of Human Resources

 10 

 2 

 C 

C

BSP321

Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership

10

2

C

C

BSP109

International Management

10

2

O

O

BSP112

Information Systems Management & Strategy

10

2

O

O

BSP220

Media Management

10

2

O

O

BSP314

Managing Innovation

20

 3 

 C 

C

BSI335

MBA Internship

0

3

C

N/A

BSP310

Project Management

10

3

O

O

BSP305

Operations Management

10

3

O

O

BSP115

ESSAM

20

3

O

O

BSI335

MBA Internship

0

3

O

N/A

 

MBA Optional  Modules                                                     

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA Programme (full-time pathway) will undertake optional modules with a total module weight of 30 credits.  Students on the part-time pathway will undertake optional modules with a total module weight of 60 credits.  Option choices may be subject to change and/or timetabling constraints.

MBA with Internship

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA with Internship will undertake the MBA Internship module BSI335. The professional placement will start either at the end of semester 2 or at the end of semester 3.

4.2 The School reserves the right to offer or to withdraw any module. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Assessment

5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

- To be eligible for the award of MBA candidates must have achieved credit in BSP319 or BSP322.

- To be eligilble for the award of MBA with Internship candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSI335, the MBA Internship module. Candidates who have not successfully completed BSI335 the MBA Professional Placement module but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA. 

5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of module BSP319 or BSP322, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period. 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MBA/ MBA with Internship (2017 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Association of MBAs (AMBA)

Final award MBA/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Business Administration/Business Administration with Internship
Programme code BSPT20, BSPT22,BSPT24
Length of programme The ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ MBA programme is offered on a full-time and a part-time basis. The programme commences in October of each academic year. The period of study for the award of MBA is twelve calendar months when studied as a full-time programme and twenty-four to thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme. The period of study for the MBA with Internship is 24 calendar months inclusive of the Internship.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MBA Full time: 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Attract sufficient richly experienced managers from a wide range of educational, business and commercial backgrounds to create a positive learning environment for all participants.
  • Provide such managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of general intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management.
  • Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities internationally, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations.
  • Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing employment within the business, commercial and public sectors, and through an emphasis in all subjects onmanagerial relevance.
  • Develop highly trained and adaptable managers who are able to meet the management and professional needs of organisations that are facing the challenges of the future.
  • Develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
  • Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas
  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines
  • Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines
  • School of Business and Economics ('The School') Mission Statement of General Aims for Postgraduate Programmes
  • The University Academic Quality Procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • the contexts and processes in which enterprsie and innovation are able to thrive and prosper - including managerial style, organisational culture and stakeholder expectations.

 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business contextincluding word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
  • effectively engage with organisations adopting new approaches to managing enterprise and produce a group consultancy repoort on an orgnaisational strategic initiative. 

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Content

Code

Module title

Modular weight

Semester

Core/Option FT pathway

Core/Option PT pathway

BSP301

Marketing

10

1

C

         C

BSP302

Accounting and Performance Manangement

10

1

C

C

BSP313

Problem Solving for Leaders

10

1

C

         C

BSP304

Business Economics

10

1

C

C

BSP321

Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership

10

1

C

C

BSP317

Leading Strategic Change

20

1

C

O

BSP319

Business Administration Project

 30 

1- 3

C

C

BSP322

Work Based Learning Project and Research Methods

30

1-3

 C

N/A

BSP306

Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services

10

2

O

O

BSP300

Business Analytics

10

2

C

C

BSP308

Corporate Finance

10

2

C

O

BSP303

Management of Human Resources

 10 

 2 

 C 

C

BSP109

International Management

10

2

O

O

BSP112

Information Systems Management & Strategy

10

2

O

O

BSP305

Operations Management

10

2

O

O

BSP220

Media Management

10

2

O

O

BSP314

Managing Innovation

20

2- 3 

 C 

C

BSP310

Project Management

10

3

O

O

BSP115

ESSAM

20

3

O

O

BSI335

MBA Internship

0

Y2

O

N/A

 

MBA Optional  Modules                                                     

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA Programme (full-time pathway) will undertake optional modules with a total module weight of 30 credits.  Students on the part-time pathway will undertake optional modules with a total module weight of 60 credits.  Option choices may be subject to change and/or timetabling constraints.

MBA with Internship

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA with Internship will undertake the MBA Internship module BSI335. The professional placement will start either at the end of semester 2 or at the end of semester 3.

4.2 The School reserves the right to offer or to withdraw any module. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Assessment

5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

- To be eligible for the award of MBA candidates must have achieved credit in BSP319 or BSP322.

- To be eligilble for the award of MBA with Internship candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSI335, the MBA Internship module. Candidates who have not successfully completed BSI335 the MBA Professional Placement module but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA. 

5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of module BSP319 or BSP322, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period. 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MBA/ MBA with Internship (2018 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Association of MBAs (AMBA)

Final award MBA/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Business Administration/Business Administration with Internship
Programme code BSPT22,BSPT24
Length of programme The ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ MBA programme is offered on a full-time basis. The programme commences in October of each academic year. The period of study for the award of MBA is twelve calendar months. The period of study for the MBA with Internship is 24 calendar months inclusive of the Internship.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MBA Full time: 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Attract sufficient richly experienced managers from a wide range of educational, business and commercial backgrounds to create a positive learning environment for all participants.
  • Provide such managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of general intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management.
  • Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities internationally, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations.
  • Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing employment within the business, commercial and public sectors, and through an emphasis in all subjects onmanagerial relevance.
  • Develop highly trained and adaptable managers who are able to meet the management and professional needs of organisations that are facing the challenges of the future.
  • Develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
  • Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas.
  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines
  • Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines
  • School of Business and Economics ('The School') Mission Statement of General Aims for Postgraduate Programmes
  • The University Academic Quality Procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • the contexts and processes in which enterprise and innovation are able to thrive and prosper - including managerial style, organisational culture and stakeholder expectations.

 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
  • effectively engage with organisations adopting new approaches to managing enterprise and produce a group consultancy report on an organisational strategic initiative. 

 

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Content

Code

Module title

Modular weight

Semester

Core/Option

BSP301

Marketing

10

1

C

BSP302

Accounting and Performance Manangement

10

1

C

BSP313

Problem Solving for Leaders

10

1

C

BSP304

Business Economics

10

1

C

BSP321

Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership

10

1

C

BSP317

Leading Strategic Change

20

1

C

BSP319

Business Administration Project

 30 

1- 3

C

BSP322

Work Based Learning Project and Research Methods

30

1-3

 C

BSP306

Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services

10

3

O

BSP300

Business Analytics

10

2

C

BSP308

Corporate Finance

10

2

C

BSP303

Management of Human Resources

 10 

 2 

 C 

BSP109

International Management

10

2

O

BSP112

Information Systems Management & Strategy

10

2

O

BSP305

Operations Management

10

2

O

BSP220

Managing Corporate Reputation

10

2

O

BSP314

Managing Innovation

20

2- 3 

 C 

BSP310

Project Management

10

2

O

BSP115

ESSAM

20

3

O

BSI335

MBA Internship

0

Y2

O

 

MBA Optional  Modules                                                     

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA Programme (full-time pathway) will undertake optional modules with a total module weight of 30 credits.    Option choices may be subject to change and/or timetabling constraints.

MBA with Internship

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA with Internship will undertake the MBA Internship module BSI335. The professional placement will start either at the end of semester 2 or at the end of semester 3.

4.2 The School reserves the right to offer or to withdraw any module. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Assessment

5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

- To be eligible for the award of MBA candidates must have achieved credit in BSP319 or BSP322.

- To be eligilble for the award of MBA with Internship candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSI335, the MBA Internship module. Candidates who have not successfully completed BSI335 the MBA Professional Placement module but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA. 

5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of module BSP319 or BSP322, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's Special Assessment Period. 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MBA Business Administration/ MBA Sports Management (2018 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Association of MBAs (AMBA)

Accreditation received: 2015

 

EQUIS

Accreditation 1st received: 2008

Accreditation renewal: 2017

 

AACSB International

Accreditation received: 2014

 

Institute for Apprenticeships

Senior Leader Master’s Degree Apprenticeship Standard

Final award MBA/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title MBA Business Administration/ MBA Sports Management
Programme code BSPTM1 MBA Business Administration; BSPTM2 MBA Business Administration [Apprenticeship]; BSPTM3 MBA Sports Management; BSPTM4 MBA Sports Management [Apprenticeship]
Length of programme The period of study for the award of MBA is typically thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MBA Full time: 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The MBA programme is specifically targeted at developing globally-minded leaders who have a broad grounding in complex leadership and management issues.  The programme provides an opportunity for individuals and organisational employees to develop leadership and management skills with a specific focus on maximising business performance and enabling students to fulfil their potential. The programme is aimed at experienced middle managers wanting to move into a senior management role, and individuals wishing to build their own businesses. The pathway option (Sports Management) allows students to tailor some learning to the specialist area while delivering the same opportunities and aims as the general MBA programme.

 

The MBA programme aims to:

  • Provide managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management, so as to enhance their effectiveness as managers and leaders;

  • Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations;

  • Create executives who have a range of skills and attributes particularly relevant to business and management, which equip them to be able to deal with complex business problems in an increasingly dynamic global business environment;

  • Create business leaders who are responsible for direction and vision, providing a clear sense of purpose, and leading organisational change;

  • Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing engagement with practice, enabling them to ground their new knowledge within their past professional experience and apply it to new situations;

  • Develop adaptable, innovative, inclusive and ethically-minded leaders, acting as role models within their organisations, who can meet the management and professional needs of organisations in a global business context now and in the future;

  • Encourage enthusiasm and self-motivation, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas; and

  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

  • Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines

  • Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines

  • Senior Leaders Level 7 Masters Apprenticeship Standard (IoA)

  • CMI Level 7 Diploma in Strategic Management and Leadership

  • In line with the School of Business and Economics ('The School') Aims with regards to Management Education

  • The University Academic Quality Procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

 

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of…

 

K1 ... the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;

 

K2 … the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;

 

K3 … the dynamics of organisational leadership and management - including relevant theories, models, and frameworks of effective leadership and management of organisations, focusing on the processes of decision-making in uncertainty that help them shape the future of an organisation within the business environment;

 

K4 … the contexts and processes in which enterprise and innovation can thrive and prosper with an emphasis on understanding, responding to and shaping the dynamic and changing nature of business; and

 

K5 … the interrelationships among and the integration between the areas covered in the programme and how to remove subject and functional boundaries so as to handle complex situations holistically;

 

 

K6…the context and processes relevant to managing sports organisations, with an emphasis on understanding, responding to and shaping organisational performance within an international sports management environment.

 

 

Application of Knowledge and understanding: K6 relates specifically to the Sports Management pathway.

 

 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to…

C1 ... use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios and transform such data and concepts into effective solutions;

C2 … analyse and appraise practical issues and problems in business and management by using or adapting the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;

C3 … use information and knowledge effectively in order to abstract meaning from information and to share knowledge, using appropriate qualitative and quantitative data analysis skills;

C4 … solve complex problems and make decisions, using logical processes, and be able to implement and review decisions;

C5 … analyse and appraise sports-specific problems in business and management by using or adapting appropriate theories and models.

 

Application of Subject-specific cognitive skills: C5 relates specifically to the Sports Management pathway.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to…

P1 ... effectively communicate with others, including networking, listening, persuasion and influencing, oral and written communication of complex ideas and arguments, using a range of media;

P2 … effectively conduct research into business and management issues, using an appropriate research design, including developing appropriate data collection, analysis and reporting methods, drawing on a range of sources of business-related materials and data, including official statistics;

P3 … select an appropriate leadership style for different situations; setting objectives, motivating, monitoring performance, coaching and mentoring; and

P4 … effectively engage with an organisation to execute a practically-based study, applying commercial acumen to produce a business report with clear, persuasive managerial conclusions.

P5 … develop strategies and plans for managing organisations within an international sports context.

 

Application of Subject-specific practical skills:  P5 relates specifically to the Sports Management pathway.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

 

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to…

T1 ... display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution, and networking;

T2 … be able to create and evaluate a range of appropriate options, being aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;

T3 … apply critical thinking and creativity to solve practical problems;

T4 … integrating knowledge from across disciplines to solve complex problems holistically;

T5 … scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T6 …effectively perform within team environments and be able to recognise and utilise own and other individuals’ contributions in group processes;

T7 … recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices to address ethical dilemmas;

T8 … use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;

T9 … demonstrate high personal effectiveness: critical self-awareness, self-reflection and self-management; and the ability to learn through reflection on practice and experience.

 

Application of Key transferable skills:  All practical skills relate to all programme pathways.

 

4. Programme structure

Content

The compulsory core modules listed equate to 150 credits of the required 180 credits.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA programme will undertake optional modules (listed in this programme specification) with a total module weight of 30 credits.

Students on the MBA Sports Management programme must undertake 20 credits of specialist optional modules that are compulsory for this pathway (* in the list of modules) and select 10 credits from the remaining optional modules.   

Code

Module title

Modular weight

MBA

Core/Option

MBA Sports Mgt

Core/Option

BSP150

Personal Effectiveness

10

C

C

BSP151

Accounting, Financial Management & Economics

10

C

C

BSP152

Business Analytics

10

C

C

BSP153

Problem Solving for Leaders

10

C

C

BSP154

Managing Innovation

10

C

C

BSP155

Managing People

10

C

C

BSP156

Operations Management

10

C

C

BSP157

Strategic Marketing

10

C

C

BSP158

Leading the Organisation: Leading People

10

C*

C*

BSP159

Leading the Organisation: Strategy, Governance & Markets

10

C

C

BSP160

Leading Strategic Change

20

C*

C*

BSP164

Work-based Learning Project and Research Methods

30

C

N/A

BSP165

Work-based Learning Project and Research Methods (Sports Management)

30

N/A

C

BSP112

Information Systems: Strategy and Management

10

O

O

BSP115

Advanced Management (ESSAM)

20

O

O

BSP161

Corporate Finance

10

O

O

BSP162

International Intensive Study Period

10

O

O

BSP163

Managing the Global Firm

10

O*

O

BSP204

Managing Sports Organisations

10

O

C

BSP220

Managing Corporate Reputation

10

O*

C

BSP306

Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services

10

O

O

BSP310

Project Management

10

O

O

 * Pre-requisites exist.   

4.1 Optional  Modules   

 Whilst students will have the opportunity to undertake all their Core modules and their choice of Option modules during their period of study, we cannot guarantee the availability of any module in a specific year. Availability may be subject to change due to, for example, unforeseen circumstances, staff timetabling issues or student demand. Details of issues that may affect availability are detailed in the University’s Terms and Conditions of Study.

A study plan which giverns the scheduling of the programme of study and registration periods will be established at the commencement of the programme.  Students are required to act in accordance with this plan.

4.2 Degree Apprenticeships

Students registered on Apprenticeship varients of this programme should note the additional requirements of the programme.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Assessment

5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

  • To be eligible for the award of MBA Business Administration candidates must have achieved credit in BSP164 (Work-based project).

  • To be eligible for the award of MBA Sports Management candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSP204 (Managing Sports Organisations, BSP220 (Managing Corporate Reputation) and BSP165 (Work-based project – Sports Management). Candidates who have not successfully completed these modules but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA Business Administration.

5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of module BSP164 and BSP165 (Work-based Project), candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MBA/ MBA International Sports Management/ MBA with Internship(2012-2014 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Association of MBAs (AMBA)

Final award MBA/PGDip/PGCert
Programme title Business Administration/ Business Administration (International Sports Management)/ Business Administration with Internship
Programme code BSPT20, BSPT22, BSPT23, BSPT24
Length of programme The ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ MBA programme is offered on a full-time and a part-time basis. The ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ MBA (International Sports Management) is only offered on a part-time basis. The full-time programme commences in October of each academic year and the part-time programme in both October and February. The International Sports Management MBA commences in October of each academic year.
The period of study for the award of MBA is twelve calendar months when studied as a full-time programme and twenty-four to thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme. The period of study for the MBA with Internship is 24 calendar months inclusive of the Internship.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

MBA Full time: 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Attract sufficient richly experienced managers from a wide range of educational, business and commercial backgrounds to create a positive learning environment for all participants.
  • Provide such managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of general intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management.
  • Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities internationally, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations.
  • Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing employment within the business, commercial and public sectors, and through an emphasis in all subjects onmanagerial relevance.
  • Develop highly trained and adaptable managers who are able to meet the management and professional needs of organisations that are facing the challenges of the future.
  • Develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
  • Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas
  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines
  • Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines
  • School of Business and Economics ('The School') Mission Statement of General Aims for Postgraduate Programmes
  • The University Academic Quality Procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • A1 - the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • A2 - the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • A3 - how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • A4 - the contexts and processes in which enterprsie and innovation are able to thrive and prosper - including managerial style, organisational culture and stakeholder expectations.

For the MBA (International Sports Management):

  • A5 - the International Sports Management environment, including regulation, governance and legal frameworks. 

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business contextincluding word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.

For the full-time MBA: 

  • effectively engage with organisations adopting new approaches to managing enterprise and produce a group consultancy repoort on an orgnaisational strategic initiative. 

For the MBA (International Sports Management):

  • effectively engage with organisations int he sports management sector to produce a group consultancy report on an organisational strategic initiative. 
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • use effective team-working skills including leadership, team building and project management;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Content

Code

Module title

Modular weight

Semester

Full-time MBA

Part-time MBA

MBA (International Sports Management)

 

BSP300

Business Analytics

10

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP301

Marketing

10

2

c

N/A

N/A

BSP302

Accounting and Performance Manangement

10

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP303

Management of Human Resources

10

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP304

Business Economics

10

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP308

Corporate Finance

10

2

c

N/A

N/A

 BSP313

 Problem Solving for Leaders

10 

N/A 

N/A 

BSP314

Managing Innovation

20

2

c

N/A

N/A

BSP317

Leading Strategic Change

20

1

c

N/A

N/A

BSP319

Business Administration Project and Research Methods

30

3

c

N/A

N/A

 BSP321

 Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership

10 

N/A 

N/A 

BSP115

Advanced Management

20

3

c

option

N/A

BSP100

Business Analytics

10

1

N/A

c

N/A

BSP101

Marketing

10

1

N/A

c

N/A

BSP102

Accounting for Managers

10

2

N/A

c

N/A

BSP103

Management of Human Resources

10

2

N/A

c

N/A

BSP104

Business Economics

10

1

N/A

c

N/A

BSP105

Operations Management

10

2

N/A

c

N/A

 BSP113

 Problem Solving for Leaders

10 

 2

 N/A

o

BSP114

Managing Innovation

20

2

N/A

c

N/A

BSP119

Business Administration Project and Research Methods

30

3

N/A

c

N/A

 BSP121

 Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership

10 

 3

N/A 

BSP200

Business Analytics

10

Y1,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP201

Marketing

10

Y1,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP202

Accounting for Managers

10

Y1,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP203

Human Resource Management in Sports Organisations

10

Y1,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP204

Sports Management Environment

10

Y1,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP205

Operations Management

10

Y1,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP210

Project Management

10

Y2,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP220

Media Management

10

Y2,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP214

Managing Sports Technology and Innovation

20

Y2,S2

N/A

N/A

c

BSP217

Leading Strategic Change

20

Y2,S1

N/A

N/A

c

BSP215

International Sports Management

30

Y2,S3

N/A

N/A

c

BSP225

Sports Management Project

30

Y2,S3

N/A

N/A

c

 

MBA Optional  Modules                                                     

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the part-time MBA Programme will undertake optional modules from the current School catalogue of available MBA options with a total module weight of 60 credits.  Students on the full-time/full-time with internship MBA programme will undertake optional modules from the current school catalogue of available MBA options with a module module weight of 30 credits.

MBA Module Selection

Students registered on the part-time or International Sports Management MBA may select modules from any programme within the MBA suite.  However students must complete the core modules of their programme, therefore where appropriate, choices must be equivalent to the core modules of their registered programme.

MBA with Internship

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA with Internship will undertake the MBA Professional Placement module BSI335. The professional placement will start either at the end of semester 2 or at the end of semester 3.

4.2 The School reserves the right to offer or to withdraw any module. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 Assessment

5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

- To be eligible for the award of MBA candidates must have achieved credit in BSP119, BSP319 or BSP225.

- To be eligilble for the award of MBA with Professional Placement candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSI335, the MBA Professional Placement module. Candidates who have not successfully completed BSI335 the MBA Professional Placement module but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA. 

5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of modules BSP119, BSP319 and BSP225 Project, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period. 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MSc Economics & Finance/Financial Economics (2016 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Economics and Finance
Programme code Degree Paths: Economics and Finance(ECTP31) Financial Economics (ECPT37)
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of MSc.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To provide basic training for doctoral level research, including a sound foundation in research methods and economic theory, with a choice of fields of specialisation in economics and finance.
  • To allow students to be awarded MSc in Economics and Finance or MSc Financial Economics.
  • To equip students with appropriate tools allowing them to understand and analyse contemporary issues in economic policy.
  • To develop in students a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of advances in core microeconomic and macroeconomic theory
  • Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of either the operations of financial markets, institutions and systems around the World or core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment
  • Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques necessary to allow for formal analysis of the above mentioned material
  • Undertake independent research in economics and finance, using appropriate research tools and quantitative methods.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Analyse theoretical and practical problems in economics and finance by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines
  • Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in economics and finance
  • Use the professional and academic literature in economics and finance to formulate questions suitable for empirical research
  • Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in economics and finance.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Present word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in economics and finance
  • Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • Apply skills in analysis (including statistical analysis) and problem formulation to areas of general debate other than economics and finance
  • Use skills in synthesis to formulate key issues in areas of general debate other than economics and finance.
  • Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines.

More generally, students should have further developed skills in:

  • Numeracy;
  • Logical thinking and problem solving
  • Use of information technology (retrieval of data, data analysis using statistical packages and computer files, web-based information searching, basic word-processing and spreadsheet methods)
  • Written communication
  • Time management and decision-making
  • Independent study
  • Group study.

4. Programme structure

4.1      Semester 1 (Total Modular Weight 60)

            a) Compulsory Modules 

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP204

Economics of Firms and Markets

15

ECP205

Macroeconomic Policy and Financial Markets

15

ECP206

Economic Data Analysis

15

ECP104

Research Communication (continued in Semester 2)

 

           b) Optional Module

            One module with a total modular weight of 15 to be chosen from the list below. 

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP201

The Financial System

15

ECP202

Financial Economics

15

MAP104

Introduction to Measure Theory and Martingales (subject to permission by Programme Director)

15

MAP114

Stochastic Models in Finance (subject to permission by Programme Director)

15

 4.2      Semester 2 (Total Modular Weight 75)

            a) Compulsory Modules  

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP256

Applied Financial Econometrics

15

ECP104

Research Communication (continued from Semester 1)

15

           b) Optional Modules 

            Three modules with a total modular weight of 45 to be chosen from the list below.  

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP150

International Money and Finance

15

ECP158

Applied Banking and Financial Modelling

15

ECP251

Risk Management and Derivatives

15

ECP254

Banking and Financial Markets

15

ECP255

Corporate Finance

15

MAP204

Stochastic Calculus and Theory of Stochastic Pricing (Pre-Req MAP104)

15

  4.3       Assessed Research (Total Modular Weight 45)

During the summer period candidates will be required to submit a dissertation. 

                Dissertation

CODE

TITLE

MODULAR WEIGHT

ECP305

Dissertation

45

  • The subject of the dissertation will be a topic in economics or finance, and will be supervised by a full-time member of staff in the School of Business and Economics.

    All work for the dissertation must be undertaken on a full-time basis at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ, except in very special circumstances and with the prior agreement of the dissertation supervisor and module organiser.

  • Two copies of the dissertation, in approved form, should be submitted.

  • A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of 40-49% will be permitted to submit a revised version on one occasion only. A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of less than 40% will be permitted to submit a Dissertation on a new topic on one occasion only. In either case the date for re-submission will be set by the Review Board.

     Dissertation Registration Criteria

  • The student must submit a research proposal by 5:00 pm on the first Friday of the summer term. This proposed topic must be accepted by a dissertation supervisor and the module organiser, according to conditions set out in the module specifications for ECP305 (Dissertation).  A student who does not submit an acceptable proposal will be allocated a dissertation topic, chosen by the module organiser.

  • No more than three students will normally be allocated to any one supervisor.

  • A dissertation that is not written on the accepted topic cannot be submitted without the prior approval of both the module organiser and the dissertation supervisor.

    General Provisions

    The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to offer or withdraw any taught module.

    The School of Business and Economics may exercise its discretion in waiving prerequisites for its modules under exceptional circumstances. 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.  However for the Postgraduate Diploma: candidates must accumulate 105 credits plus marks of 40-49% in modules worth a total of at least 15 credits.

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a taught module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.

5.3 All examinations and tests must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.

5.4 The MSc/PGDip in Economics and Finance will normally be awarded following successful completion of programme requirements.  However students who have successfully completed named modules may qualify for MSc awards as specified in 5.5 below.

5.5 The MSc in Financial Economics may be awarded following successful completion of programme requirements to include the modules Financial Economics (ECP202) and at least one of Asset Management and Derivatives (ECP251) or Corporate Finance (ECP255) and a dissertation (ECP305 in an acceptable field of financial economics.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Business Analysis and Management 2016 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc /PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Business Analysis and Management
Programme code BSPT09
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/businessanalysisandmanagement/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

    • add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles in these;
    • provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business and management to well-qualified students from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds;
    • develop modelling, analysis and consultancy skills and expertise with a strong emphasis on quantitative and IT intensive techniques for handling complex business decision problems to improve business and management practice;
    • prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations and, in particular, careers as business analysts or business consultants, by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
    • enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context:
  • the numerical, analytical and computer based tools, techniques and approaches that are required for the thorough analysis and solution of complex decision problems in a business context, together with the advantages and disadvantages and necessary precautions in using them.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

 On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • interpret extensive and complex numerical information to assess and evaluate alternative course of action in business decision making;
  • formulate management decision problems in terms of appropriate models, identifying objectives, constraints and alternative options, and assess the validity of such formulations;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • select and apply a range of sophisticated numerical and computer based techniques for analysing and resolving complex decision making problems in business situations;
  • interact effectively with other management professionals in assisting them to resolve planning problems;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • apply sophisticated numerical reasoning in solving problems;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • evaluate the merits of different software packages and acquire skills in new software packages quickly;
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1       Module Structure

            Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)  

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP020

Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP021

Accounting and Financial Management

15

1

BSP029

Marketing in the Organisation

15

1

BSP023

Operations Management

15

1

BSP030

Personal Development for Study and Employability

15

1 & 2

BSP035

Operational Research Methods

15

2

BSP043

Business Forecasting

15

2

BSP039

Business Analysis & Planning

30

3

BSP028

Global Strategic Management

15

3

SEMESTER 2 OPTION MODULES

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below. 

BUSINESS ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP024

Business Economics

15

2

BSP026

Information Systems and Management

15

2

BSP044

Services & Retail Management

15

2

BSP045

Work Psychology

15

2

BSP046

Enterprise Resource Planning

15

2

BSP047

Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

*Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.

4.1.1     For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.

4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

4.4 Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulsory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided that the ILOs of the programme are still met.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028 Global Strategic Management and BSP039  Business  Analysis and Planning  in January  of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management 2018 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Management
Programme code BSPT10
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/management/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

       

The programme aims to:                     

  • add value to holders of a wide range of first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management;
     

  • produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
  • enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.

     

  • prepare graduates for a significant career in a wide range of roles in management, consultancy and entrepreneurship. 

 

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management

The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Module Structure

       Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 135)

            

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP020    

Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP021    

Accounting and Financial Management

15

1

BSP029    

Marketing in the Organisation

15

1

BSP023    

Operations Management

15

1

BSP030   

Personal Development for Study and Employability

15

1 & 2

BSP026

Information Systems and Management

15

2

BSP027

Management Analysis

30

3

BSP028

Global Strategic Management

15

3

 Semester Two Option Modules

In addition to the listed compulsory Modules, students will choose THREE Modules (total Module weight 45) to be chosen from the list below.

MANAGEMENT

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP025

Business Environment Analysis

15

2

BSP040

International Marketing

15

2

BSP041

Small Business & Entrepreneurship

15

2

BSP043

Business Forecasting

15

2

BSP045

Work Psychology

15

2

BSP046

Enterprise Resource Planning

15

2

BSP047

Global Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

BSP062

Brand Management

15

2

BSP068

Marketing Communications

15

2

*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).

4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module. 

4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

4.4  Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided that the ILOs of the programme are still met.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period. 

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028 Global Strategic Management and BSP027  Management Analysis  in January of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc International Management 2017 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title International Management
Programme code BSPT11
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Part Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Add value to holders of a wide range of first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of International  management, and organisations;

  • Provide a relevant, practical, applied and integrated curriculum through close links with business and commercial organisations and appropriate academic research;

  • Develop appropriate skills to apply knowledge and understanding of International business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;

  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations (especially international ones) - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external, international context in which organisations (especially international ones) operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed in an international context- including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and international management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the international context.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex international scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in international management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current international business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of international business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
  • Use communication technologies effectively to present and communicate their work to an international audience including specialists and non-specialists.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

1 Module Structure

       Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)

 

Code          

Subject Title

Modular

Weight

Semester

BSP029

Marketing in the Organisation

15

1

BSP032

Cross Cultural Management

15

1

BSP033

International Business Environment

15

1

BSP038

Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services

15

1

BSP030

Personal Development for Study and Employability

15

1 & 2

BSP025

Business Environment Analysis

15

2

BSP040

International Marketing

15

2

BSP028

Global Strategic Management

15

3

BSP031

International Management Analysis

30

3

Semester 2 Option Modules.

In addition to the listed complusory modules, students will choose TWO modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.

INTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENT

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP036

X-Culture

15

2

BSP026

Information Systems and Management

15

2

BSP045

Work Psychology

15

2

BSP046

Enterprise Resource Planning

15

2

BSP047

Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

 *Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.

4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.

4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

4.4  Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulsory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided that the ILOs of the programme are still met.

Semester 2 International exchange option

Candidates may replace the modules required for Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University.  Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits as required by the School of Business and Economics.  The module 'Personal Development for Study and Employability' will be continued online during the semester abroad.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028 Global Strategic Management and BSP031  International Management Analysis in January  of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Marketing 2017 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Marketing
Programme code BSPT13
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Add value to holders of a wide range of first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of  marketing, management and organisations;

  • Provide a relevant, practical, applied and integrated curriculum through close links with business and commercial organisations and appropriate academic research;

  • Develop appropriate skills to apply knowledge and understanding of marketing and management to complex marketing issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;

  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

QAA Master’s awards in business and management

The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • The concepts, methods, processes, management and institutions involved in marketing goods and services

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business, marketing and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current marketing or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business and marketing context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of marketing and management related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Module Structure

Compulsory Modules  (total modular weight 150)

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP020

Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP021

Accounting and Financial Management

15

1

BSP029

Marketing in the Organisation

15

1

BSP061

Innovation and Entrepreneurship

15

1

BSP030

Personal Development for Study and Employability

15

1 & 2

BSP064

Digital Marketing and Social Media

15

2

BSP066

Making Marketing Work

15

2

BSP063

Business Market Review

15

3

BSP069

Strategic Marketing Solutions

30

3

Semester 2 Optional Modules

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO Modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.

MARKETING

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP040

International Marketing

15

2

BSP044

Services & Retail Management

15

2

BSP047

Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

BSP062

Brand Management

15

2

BSP065

Market Research Methods

15

2

BSP068

Marketing Communications

15

2

*Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.

4.1.1     For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module. 

4.3  The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

4.4  Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulsory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided that the ILOs of the programme are still met.

4.5   Alongside their MSc Marketing programme, students with business background will have the opportunity to study for a Professional Diploma from the Chartered Institute of Marketing.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSPxxx Business Market review and BSP069  Strategic Marketing Solutions in January of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Marketing (2018 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Marketing
Programme code BSPT13
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Add value to holders of a wide range of first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of  marketing, management and organisations;

  • Provide a relevant, practical, applied and integrated curriculum through close links with business and commercial organisations and appropriate academic research;

  • Develop appropriate skills to apply knowledge and understanding of marketing and management to complex marketing issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;

  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

QAA Master’s awards in business and management

The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:

  • the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • The concepts, methods, processes, management and institutions involved in marketing goods and services

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business, marketing and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current marketing or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business and marketing context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of marketing and management related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Module Structure

Compulsory Modules  (total modular weight 150)

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP020

Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP029

Marketing in the Organisation

15

1

BSP061

Innovation and Entrepreneurship

15

1

BSP065

Market Research Methods

15

1

BSP030

Personal Development for Study and Employability

15

1 & 2

BSP064

Digital Marketing and Social Media

15

2

BSP066

Making Marketing Work

15

2

BSP028

Global Strategic Management

15

3

BSP069

Strategic Marketing Solutions

30

3

Semester 2 Optional Modules

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO Modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.

MARKETING

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP025

Business Environment Analysis

15

2

BSP040

International Marketing

15

2

BSP044

Services & Retail Management

15

2

BSP047

Global Logistics & Supply Chain Management

15

2

BSP062

Brand Management

15

2

BSP068

Marketing Communications

15

2

*Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.

4.1.1     For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module. 

4.3  The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

4.4  Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulsory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided that the ILOs of the programme are still met.

4.5   Alongside their MSc Marketing programme, students with business background will have the opportunity to study for a Professional Diploma from the Chartered Institute of Marketing.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028 Global Strategic Management and BSP069  Strategic Marketing Solutions in January of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Finance and Management 2018 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Finance and Management
Programme code BSPT12
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • Add value to holders of a wide range of first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of finance,  management and organisations;

  • Provide a relevant, practical, applied and integrated curriculum through close links with business and commercial organisations and appropriate academic research

  • Develop appropriate finance skills to apply knowledge and understanding of finance to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;

  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society;

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management

The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of: 

  • the internal aspects, functions, processes and financing of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
  • the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
  • how organisations are managed and financially controlled - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
  • how financial markets operate for different financial products in different market and regulatory settings

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business and finance disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
  • analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business, management and finance by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
  • collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business, management or finance situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business and finance context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business and finance related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
  • use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
  • be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
  • apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
  • solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
  • scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
  • recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
  • recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
  • use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.

4. Programme structure

4.1        Module Structure

             Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

BSP020

Human Resource Management

15

1

BSP054

Accounting and Performance Measurement

15

1

BSP029

Marketing in the Organisation

15

1

BSP050

Foundations of Corporate Finance

15

1

BSP030

Personal Development for Study and Employability

15

1 & 2

BSP052

Financial Theory and Corporate Policy

15

2

BSP053

Corporate and Wholesale Finance

15

2

BSP060

International Financial Management

15

2

BSP056

Current Issues in Finance

15

3

BSP028

Global Strategic Management

15

3

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO Modules, (total modular weight 30), one to be chosen from List A and one from list B below. 

FINANCE AND MANAGEMENT

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

LIST A

 

 

 

BSP024

Business Economics

15

2

BSP025

Busines Environment Analysis

15

2

BSP041

Small Business & Entrepreneurship

15

2

BSP043

Business Forecasting

 15 

2

BSP044

Services & Retail Management

15

2

LIST B

     
BSP055 Financial Derivatives             15               3
BSP434 Corporate Governance and Responsibility             15               3

*Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.

4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module. 

4.3  The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

4.4  Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulsory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided the ILOs of the programme are still met.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition  students  may choose  to be reassessed in BSP028 Global Strategic Management, BSP055  Financial  Derivatives, BSP434 Corporate Governance and Responsibility and BSP056  Current  Issues in Finance in January  of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Economics and Business Strategy/ MSc Economics and International Business 2018 entry

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc; (PGDip + PGCert awarded as exit awards only)
Programme title Economics and Business Strategy; Economics and International Business
Programme code MSc Economics and Business Strategy (ECPT33); MSc Economics and International Business (ECPT32)
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of the MSc.
UCAS code n/a
Admissions criteria

MSc Economics and Business Strategy - 
MSc Economics and International Business -

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To enable students to evaluate theories and applications of microeconomics in relation to business strategy and/or international business management. 
  • To prepare students vocationally for employment in government, commerce and industry. 
  • To provide a relevant, practical, applied and integrated curriculum through close links with business and commercial organisations and appropriate academic research. 
  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society. 

For MSc Economics and International Business 

  • To develop appropriate skills and understanding of Economics and International Business Management so as to systematically and creatively improve the business and management practice of firms operating in international environments. 

For MSc Economics and Business Strategy 

  • To develop appropriate skills and understanding of Economics and Business Strategy so as to be able to effectively evaluate the determinants of business performance, and thereby contribute to the formulation of business strategy in a wide variety of firms and institutions.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

For MSc Economics and International Business 

K1 Analyse international business and trade theory and its relevance to informing the governance, behaviour and management of international firms and organisations, and their resulting strategic responses. 

K2 Assess the external economic, political, environmental, and institutional context faced by international businesses and organisations and its impact on firm strategy, economic behaviour and management.

K3 Critically discuss how organisations are managed in an international context.

K4 Undertake independent applied and relevant research in international economics and international business, using appropriate research tools. 

 

For MSc Economics and Business Strategy 

K1 Explain the economics of firms and markets and business strategy theory and analyse the practical implications of such theory in real world settings.   

K2 Appraise the economic determinants of business performance and how these influence business strategy. 

K3 Assess relevant theoretical models, quantitative and analytical methods, and techniques necessary to evaluate business performance. 

K4 Undertake independent applied and relevant research in economics of the firm and business strategy, using appropriate research tools and quantitative methods, and communicate the results of such technical research and analysis to non-specialist audiences.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

For MSc Economics and International Business

C1 Evaluate concepts and insights from economics and business disciplines, including complex interactions between firms, consumers, and governments in international business, trade and investment.

C2 Analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in international economics and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines.

C3 Collect relevant information pertaining to current issues in international economics and/or international business and analyse that information using appropriate models and relevant techniques, so as to evaluate the implications of decisions taken by multinational companies and other organisations and institutions. 

C4 Critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to international economics and the practice of international business.  

 

For MSc Economics and Business Strategy 

C1 Evaluate concepts and insights from economics and business disciplines, including complex interactions between firms, consumers, markets and governments and their resulting influence on business strategy. 

C2 Analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in economics and business strategy by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines. 

C3 Evaluate the relative performance of markets and firms using appropriate economic models and relevant techniques, and produce a report relevant to decision-makers in government, institutions and firms with regard to appropriate business strategies. 

C4 Collect and critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to the economic determinants of business strategy and performance and how these influence the strategic choices taken by business, government and other institutions.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1 Create written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in economics, international business, and/or business strategy.

P2 Construct and/or collate empirical data and statistical results  and interpret such data in written and oral form for both specialist and non-specialist audiences, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.  

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1 Critically analyse and evaluate complex topics.

T2  Formulate key arguments from an extensive range of evidence.

T3  Demonstrate advanced skills in numeracy ( Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques).

T4  Apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations.

T5  Use advanced information technology (e.g. handling of large data sets, multifaceted information retrieval and spread-sheet methods).

T6  Demonstrate effective personal organisation including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision-making and written and oral communication.

T7  Use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management.

T8 Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports, subject to deadlines.

4. Programme structure

Programme structure - MSc Economics and International Business 

4.1        Module Structure

             Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 135)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP204

Economics of Firms and Markets

15

1

ECP208

Industrial Organisation & Strategy

15

1

BSP033

International Business Environment

15

1

ECP200

Research Communication for Economists

10

2

ECP259

 

Economics of International Business

15

2

BSP028

Global Strategic Management

15

3

ECP314

Economics and International Business in Practice

20

3

ECP315

Economics Research Project

30

3

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose Three optional Modules (total modular weight 45). One optional Module (total modular weight 15) will be taken in Semester 1 and chosen from List A.  Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 2 and chosen from List B. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

List A

ECP206

Economic Data Analysis

15

1

BSP038

Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services

15

1

BSP029

Marketing in the Organisation

15

1

List B

ECP258

Economics of Corporate Strategy

15

2

ECP261

Applied Data Analysis for Business Strategy*

15

2

BSP047

Global Logistics and Supply Chain Management

15

2

BSP040

International Marketing#

15

2

 *To study this module ECP206 must be studied in semester one.

 #To study this module BSP029 must be studied in semester one.

Programme structure - MSc Economics and Business Strategy

 4.2        Module Structure

             Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP204

Economics of Firms and Markets

15

1

ECP208

Industrial Organisation & Strategy

15

1

ECP206

Economic Data Analysis

15

1

ECP200

Research Communication for Economists

10

2

ECP258

Economics of Corporate Strategy

15

2

ECP261

Applied Data Analysis for Business Strategy

15

2

BSP416

Policy and Strategy Analytics

15

2

ECP313

Economics and Business Strategy in Practice

20

3

ECP315

Economics Research Project

30

3

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose  Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30). One optional Module (total modular weight 15) will be taken in Semester 1 and chosen from List A.  One optional Module (total modular weight 15) will be taken in Semester 2 and chosen from List B. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

List A

ECP205

Macroeconomic Policy and Financial Markets

15

1

ECP202

Financial Economics

15

1

List B

ECP255

Corporate Finance

15

2

ECP259

Economics of International Business

15

2

BSP417

Process and Programming for Analytics

15

2

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. 

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period. 

5.3 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Weightings for the contribution to the Final Degree Classification will be consistent with the credit weighting of each module.  

Programme Specification

BS MSc Econ and Business Strategy/ MSc Econ and Intnl. Business (2017 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc; (PGDip + PGCert awarded as exit awards only)
Programme title Economics and Business Strategy; Economics and International Business
Programme code MSc Economics and Business Strategy (ECPT33); MSc Economics and International Business (ECPT32)
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of the MSc.
UCAS code n/a
Admissions criteria

MSc Economics and Business Strategy - 
MSc Economics and International Business -

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To enable students to evaluate theories and applications of microeconomics in relation to business strategy and/or international business management. 
  • To prepare students vocationally for employment in government, commerce and industry. 
  • To provide a relevant, practical, applied and integrated curriculum through close links with business and commercial organisations and appropriate academic research. 
  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society. 

For MSc Economics and International Business 

  • To develop appropriate skills and understanding of Economics and International Business Management so as to systematically and creatively improve the business and management practice of firms operating in international environments. 

For MSc Economics and Business Strategy 

  • To develop appropriate skills and understanding of Economics and Business Strategy so as to be able to effectively evaluate the determinants of business performance, and thereby contribute to the formulation of business strategy in a wide variety of firms and institutions.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

For MSc Economics and International Business 

K1 Analyse international business and trade theory and its relevance to informing the governance, behaviour and management of international firms and organisations, and their resulting strategic responses. 

K2 Assess the external economic, political, environmental, and institutional context faced by international businesses and organisations and its impact on firm strategy, economic behaviour and management.

K3 Critically discuss how organisations are managed in an international context.

K4 Undertake independent applied and relevant research in international economics and international business, using appropriate research tools. 

 

For MSc Economics and Business Strategy 

K1 Explain the economics of firms and markets and business strategy theory and analyse the practical implications of such theory in real world settings.   

K2 Appraise the economic determinants of business performance and how these influence business strategy. 

K3 Assess relevant theoretical models, quantitative and analytical methods, and techniques necessary to evaluate business performance. 

K4 Undertake independent applied and relevant research in economics of the firm and business strategy, using appropriate research tools and quantitative methods, and communicate the results of such technical research and analysis to non-specialist audiences.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

For MSc Economics and International Business

C1 Evaluate concepts and insights from economics and business disciplines, including complex interactions between firms, consumers, and governments in international business, trade and investment.

C2 Analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in international economics and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines.

C3 Collect relevant information pertaining to current issues in international economics and/or international business and analyse that information using appropriate models and relevant techniques, so as to evaluate the implications of decisions taken by multinational companies and other organisations and institutions. 

C4 Critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to international economics and the practice of international business.  

 

For MSc Economics and Business Strategy 

C1 Evaluate concepts and insights from economics and business disciplines, including complex interactions between firms, consumers, markets and governments and their resulting influence on business strategy. 

C2 Analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in economics and business strategy by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines. 

C3 Evaluate the relative performance of markets and firms using appropriate economic models and relevant techniques, and produce a report relevant to decision-makers in government, institutions and firms with regard to appropriate business strategies. 

C4 Collect and critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to the economic determinants of business strategy and performance and how these influence the strategic choices taken by business, government and other institutions.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1 Create written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in economics, international business, and/or business strategy.

P2 Construct and/or collate empirical data and statistical results  and interpret such data in written and oral form for both specialist and non-specialist audiences, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.  

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1 Critically analyse and evaluate complex topics.

T2  Formulate key arguments from an extensive range of evidence.

T3  Demonstrate advanced skills in numeracy ( Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques).

T4  Apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations.

T5  Use advanced information technology (e.g. handling of large data sets, multifaceted information retrieval and spread-sheet methods).

T6  Demonstrate effective personal organisation including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision-making and written and oral communication.

T7  Use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management.

T8 Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports, subject to deadlines.

4. Programme structure

Programme structure - MSc Economics and International Business 

4.1        Module Structure

             Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 135)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP204

Economics of Firms and Markets

15

1

ECP208

Industrial Organisation & Strategy

15

1

BSP033

International Business Environment

15

1

ECP200

Research Communication for Economists

10

1 & 2

ECP259

 

Economics of International Business

15

2

BSP028

Global Strategic Management

15

3

ECP314

Economics and International Business in Practice

20

3

ECP315

Economics Research Project

30

3

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose Three optional Modules (total modular weight 45). One optional Module (total modular weight 15) will be taken in Semester 1 and chosen from List A.  Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 2 and chosen from List B. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

List A

ECP206

Economic Data Analysis

15

1

BSP038

Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services

15

1

BSP029

Marketing in the Organisation

15

1

List B

ECP258

Economics of Corporate Strategy

15

2

ECP261

Applied Data Analysis for Business Strategy

15

2

BSP047

Logistics and Supply Chain Management

15

2

BSP040

International Marketing

15

2

 

Programme structure - MSc Economics and Business Strategy

 4.2        Module Structure

             Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP204

Economics of Firms and Markets

15

1

ECP208

Industrial Organisation & Strategy

15

1

ECP206

Economic Data Analysis

15

1

ECP200

Research Communication for Economists

10

1 & 2

ECP258

Economics of Corporate Strategy

15

2

ECP261

Applied Data Analysis for Business Strategy

15

2

BSP416

Policy and Strategy Analytics

15

2

ECP313

Economics and Business Strategy in Practice

20

3

ECP315

Economics Research Project

30

3

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose  Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30). One optional Module (total modular weight 15) will be taken in Semester 1 and chosen from List A.  One optional Module (total modular weight 15) will be taken in Semester 2 and chosen from List B. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

List A

ECP205

Macroeconomic Policy and Financial Markets

15

1

ECP202

Financial Economics

15

1

List B

ECP255

Corporate Finance

15

2

ECP259

Economics of International Business

15

2

BSP417

Leading Analytics Initiatives

15

2

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. 

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period. 

5.3 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Weightings for the contribution to the Final Degree Classification will be consistent with the credit weighting of each module.  

Programme Specification

BS MSc Economics & Finance (2018 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Economics and Finance
Programme code ECTP31
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of the MSc.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To enable students to evaluate theories of economics, finance and research methods, and apply these theories. 
  • To prepare students vocationally for employment in the financial services sectors of government, commerce and industry. 
  • To equip students with appropriate tools allowing them to understand and analyse contemporary issues in economic policy. 
  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

K1 Critically discuss advances in core microeconomic and macroeconomic theory.

K2 Appraise either the operations of financial markets, institutions and systems around the world or core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment.

K3 Appraise the relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques necessary and select appropriately to allow for formal analysis of the above-mentioned material.

K4 Undertake independent research in economics and finance, using appropriate research tools and quantitative methods.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1 Analyse theoretical and practical problems in economics and finance by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines.

C2 Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in economics and finance.

C3 Use the professional and academic literature in economics and finance to formulate questions suitable for empirical research

C4 Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in economics and finance.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1 Generate word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in economics and finance.

P2 Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1 Critically analyse and evaluate complex topics.

T2  Formulate key arguments from an extensive range of evidence.

T3  Demonstrate advanced skills in numeracy ( Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques).

T4  Apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations.

T5  Use advanced information technology (e.g. handling of large data sets, multifaceted information retrieval and spread-sheet methods).

T6  Demonstrate effective personal organisation including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision-making and written and oral communication.

T7  Use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management.

T8 Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines.

4. Programme structure

        

Module Structure

Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP204

Economics of Firms and Markets

15

1

ECP205

Macroeconomic Policy and Financial Markets

15

1

ECP202

Financial Economics

15

1

ECP206

Economic Data Analysis

15

1

ECP200

Research Communication for Economists

10

2

ECP256

Applied Financial Econometrics

15

2

ECP251

Risk Management and Derivatives

15

2

ECP255

Corporate Finance

15

2

ECP311

Financial Economics in Practice

20

3

ECP315

Economics Research Project

30

 3

Semester 2 Option Modules

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose One optional Module (total modular weight 15).

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP254

Banking and Financial Markets

15

2

ECP257

International Money and Finance

15

2

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. 

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period. 

5.3 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Weightings for the contribution to the Final Degree Classification will be consistent with the credit weighting of each module.  

Programme Specification

BS MSc Banking and Finance (2017 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Banking and Finance
Programme code ECPT36
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of the MSc.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc -

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To enable students to evaluate theories of banking, finance and research methods, and apply these theories. 
  • To prepare students vocationally for employment in the financial services sectors of government, commerce and industry. 
  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

K1 Explain and critically discuss the functions and operations of institutions, financial markets and systems, with special reference to central banks, commercial banks and other financial intermediaries.

K2 Explain and appraise the core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment, and use these theories to assist them in asset management.

K3 Undertake independent applied research in banking and finance, using basic research tools and quantitative methods appropriate to the conduct of independent research

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1 Analyse theoretical and practical problems in banking and finance by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines.

C2 Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in banking and finance.

C3 Use the professional and academic literature in banking and finance to formulate questions suitable for empirical research.

C4 Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in banking and finance.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1 Generate word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in banking and finance.

P2 Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out basic forms of statistical hypothesis testing.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1 Critically analyse and evaluate complex topics.

T2  Formulate key arguments from an extensive range of evidence.

T3  Demonstrate advanced skills in numeracy ( Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques).

T4  Apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations.

T5  Use advanced information technology (e.g. handling of large data sets, multifaceted information retrieval and spread-sheet methods).

T6  Demonstrate effective personal organisation including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision-making and written and oral communication.

T7  Use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management.

T8 Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines.

4. Programme structure

Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 105)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP202

Financial Economics

15

1

ECP201

The Financial System

15

1

ECP206

Economic Data Analysis

15

1

ECP200

Research Communication for Economists

10

1 & 2

ECP256

Applied Financial Econometrics

15

2

ECP254

Banking and Financial Markets

15

2

ECP312

Banking and Finance in Practice

20

3

 

 

 

 

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose Four optional Modules (total modular weight 75). One optional Module (total modular weight 15) will be taken in Semester 1 and chosen from List A.  Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 2 and chosen from List B.  One optional Module (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 3 and chosen from List C. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

List A

ECP204

Economics of Firms and Markets

15

1

ECP205

Macroeconomic Policy and Financial Markets

15

1

List B

ECP251

Risk Management and Derivatives

15

2

ECP255

Corporate Finance

15

2

ECP257

International Money and Finance

15

2

List C

ECP315

Economics Research Project

30

3

ECP316

Applied Research Practice Seminar

30

3

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. 

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period. 

5.3 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Weightings for the contribution to the Final Degree Classification will be consistent with the credit weighting of each module.  

Programme Specification

BS MSc Banking and Finance (2018 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Banking and Finance
Programme code ECPT36
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of the MSc.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc -

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To enable students to evaluate theories of banking, finance and research methods, and apply these theories. 
  • To prepare students vocationally for employment in the financial services sectors of government, commerce and industry. 
  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

K1 Explain and critically discuss the functions and operations of institutions, financial markets and systems, with special reference to central banks, commercial banks and other financial intermediaries.

K2 Explain and appraise the core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment, and use these theories to assist them in asset management.

K3 Undertake independent applied research in banking and finance, using basic research tools and quantitative methods appropriate to the conduct of independent research

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1 Analyse theoretical and practical problems in banking and finance by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines.

C2 Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in banking and finance.

C3 Use the professional and academic literature in banking and finance to formulate questions suitable for empirical research.

C4 Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in banking and finance.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1 Generate word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in banking and finance.

P2 Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out basic forms of statistical hypothesis testing.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1 Critically analyse and evaluate complex topics.

T2  Formulate key arguments from an extensive range of evidence.

T3  Demonstrate advanced skills in numeracy ( Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques).

T4  Apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations.

T5  Use advanced information technology (e.g. handling of large data sets, multifaceted information retrieval and spread-sheet methods).

T6  Demonstrate effective personal organisation including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision-making and written and oral communication.

T7  Use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management.

T8 Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines.

4. Programme structure

Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 105)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP202

Financial Economics

15

1

ECP201

The Financial System

15

1

ECP206

Economic Data Analysis

15

1

ECP200

Research Communication for Economists

10

2

ECP256

Applied Financial Econometrics

15

2

ECP254

Banking and Financial Markets

15

2

ECP312

Banking and Finance in Practice

20

3

ECP315

 Economics Research Project

30 

 3

Option Modules.

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose three optional Modules (total modular weight 45). One optional Module (total modular weight 15) will be taken in Semester 1 and chosen from List A.  Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 2 and chosen from List B. 

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

List A

ECP204

Economics of Firms and Markets

15

1

ECP205

Macroeconomic Policy and Financial Markets

15

1

List B

ECP251

Risk Management and Derivatives

15

2

ECP255

Corporate Finance

15

2

ECP257

International Money and Finance

15

2

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. 

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period. 

5.3 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Weightings for the contribution to the Final Degree Classification will be consistent with the credit weighting of each module.  

Programme Specification

BS MSc International Business

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc (PGDip/PGCert as exit awards only)
Programme title International Business
Programme code BSPTA5
Length of programme The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  1. provide students with an in-depth understanding of theory and practice in the areas of international business, covering key elements of current research agendas. 

  2. develop appropriate skills to apply knowledge and understanding to solve complex problems encountered in international business and management practice. 

  3. equip graduates with a solid academic basis to pursue a career in multinational companies or companies engaged in international business. 

  4. enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of: 

K1: cutting-edge and contemporary international scholarship and practice about international business. 

K2: the internal organisational aspects of international business with a specific focus on cross-cultural management, internationally distributed collaborations and international strategic decision-making. 

K3: the external organisational aspects of international business with a specific focus on the international business environment, global outsourcing and international supply chains.

K4: the contemporary requirements of international business with a specific focus on international corporate entrepreneurship, international innovation and international business negotiations.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

C1: use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from international business research to inform international decision making.

C2: analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in international business by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines.

C3: collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current international business situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to: 

P1: demonstrate sensitivity to cross-cultural differences and able to overcome barriers to cross-cultural interactions. 

P2: use negotiation skills and tactics to engage effectively in international business negotiations. 

P3: be able to take effective action to mitigate challenges in international business endeavours. 

P4: conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of international business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet. 

P5: use communication technologies effectively to present and communicate their work to an international audience including specialists and non-specialists.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1: display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution. 

T2: critically evaluate new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions. 

T3: scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge. 

T4: make effective use of information and communication technologies including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software. 

T5: use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations. 

T6: recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices.

T7: use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness.

T8: learn through reflection on practice and experience.

 

 

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules       

Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150) 

Code          

Subject Title

Modular

Weight

Semester

BSP032

International and Cross Cultural Management

15

1

BSP033

International Business Environment

15

1

BSP061

Innovation and Entrepreneurship

15

1

BSP038

Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services

15

1

BSP030

Personal Development for Study and Employability

15

1 & 2

BSP025

Business Environment Analysis

15

2

BSP070

International Business Negotiations

15

2

BSP028

Global Strategic Management

15

3

BSP073

International Company Project

30

3

Semester 2 Option Modules* 

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose two modules (total modular weight 30) from the list below: 

BSP036

X-Culture Project

15

2

BSP071

Global Social Entrepreneurship and CSR

15

2

BSP072

International Entrepreneurship and Post-Conflict Environments 

15

2

BSP046

Enterprise Resource Planning

15

2

BSP047

Global Logistics and Supply Chain Management

15

2

 

BSP064

Digital Marketing and Social Media

 15

 2

 *Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.

 

 4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications. 

4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components.  Optional modules are subject to student demand, staff availability and timetable permitting.

Semester 2 Study Abroad option 

Candidates may replace the modules required for Semester two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. The module ‘Personal Development for Study and Employability’ will be continued online during the semester abroad.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

5.3 In addition, students  may choose to be reassessed in BSP028  Global Strategic Management and BSP073 International Company Project in January of the next academic year.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Automotive Retail Management (2016, 2017 + 2018 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
  • Institute of the Motor Industry
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Automotive Retail Management
Programme code BSPT32
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of the MSc is thirty six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of the Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See:http://www.lboro.ac.uk/departments/sbe/executive-education/programmes/accredited/arm/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;

K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;

K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;

K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;

K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;

K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;

K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;

K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;

K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships;

K11. The role of digital and social media within the context of the retail automotive environment;

K12. The development of resilient and sustainable organisations within the retail automotive sector;

K13. The potential future development of the automotive industry and the role of retailing within it ;

K14. The international context in which the retail automotive sector operates;

K15. The issues of managing in a multi-cultural environment ;

K16. The knowledge of how sales and marketing activity needs to embrace international cultures.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1. Manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;

C2. Establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;

C3. Use of models of business situations and research skills;

C4. Identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;

C5. Recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;

C6. Conduct research into business and management issues;

C7. Learn through reflection on practice and experience;

C8. View the organisation from the perspective of sustainability and resilience;

C9. Recognise the management implications of different international cultures;

C10. Recognise the nuances of managing in an international context.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1. Apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;

P2. Perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;

P3. Use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;

P4. Engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;

P5. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P6. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

P7. Employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;

P8. Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;

P9. Use Social and Digital Media within the context of the retail automotive sector.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

T2. Organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T3. Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4. Listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5. Use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;

T6. Demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;

T7. Set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;

T8. Interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;

T9. Manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;

T10. Demonstrate the ability to operate appropriately in an international context.

4. Programme structure

4.1                  Compulsory Subjects  (total modular weight 40)

                                                                                                                                     Mmodule Weight

           

BSPN50 

Introduction to Business Planning

 

10

BSPN52

Operations Management

 

10

BSPN53

Foundations of Management 

 

10

BSPN54

Finance for Managers

 

      10      

 

4.2                  Optional Subjects   (total modular weight 80)

 

 

BSPN51

Generating Customer Loyalty

 

10

 

 BSPN55

 Decision Systems

 

10

 BSPN56

 Managing Business Performance

10 

 BSPN57

 Managing Quality

10 

 BSPN58

 Improving Performance Through Coaching

 

10

 BSPN65

 Management and Leadership Skills

10 

 BSPN59

 Change Management

10 

 BSPN63

 Human Resource Management

 

10

 BSPN60 

 Marketing Strategy

10 

 BSPN61

 Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market

10 

 BSPN62

 Cross Cultural Market Development

10 

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   

4.3                 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

 

BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

 

15

BSPN04

Retail Marketing Strategy

 

15

BSPN12† 

Project

 

30

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 To complete the PGCert in Automotive Retail Management students must complete the 4 x 10 credit compulsory modules and 2 x 10 credit optional modules from those offered in Section 4.2. To complete the PGDip in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules, 8 of which should be chosen from those offered in Section 4.2. To complete the MSc in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules and 60 credits from those offered in Section 4.3. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.

4.4   For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

4.5   A study plan which governs the scheduling of the programme of study and registration periods will be established at the commencement of the programme and all students are required to act in accordance with the plan

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1 To be eligible for the award of the Postgraduate Certificate in Automotive Retail Management, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits: the modules listed in 4.1 and 2 options

At the discretion of the Programme Director candidates for the Certificate may substitute for the modules listed in 4.1 with any similar modules with an equivalent or greater weight from the School of Business and Economics suite of postgraduate modules.

5.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120 from the modules listed in 4.1 and 4.2.

5.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.2 and in addition must complete 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.

 

Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Automotive Retail Management (2004 to August 2014 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
  • Institute of the Motor Industry
  • Chartered Management Institute
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Automotive Retail Management
Programme code BSPT32
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum and maximum periods of study for the awards covered by these regulations are specified in Regulation XXI.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See:http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/automotiveretailmanagement/

 

In addition:

- With the permission of the Programme Director 100 credits may be obtained towards the award of MSc on the basis of successful completion of the Professional Diploma in Retail Automotive Management.

- With the permission of the Programme Director 50 credits my be obtained towards the award of Diploma on the basis of successful completion of Professional Certificate in Retail Automotive Management.

- Candidates who have gained credits in modules from the Professional Certificate / Diploma in Retail Automotive are eligible to transfer these credits towards the awards of Postgraduate Certificate / Diploma MSc Automotive Retail Management.  Credits awarded under this provision will be at the discretion of the Programme Director.

- Continuing Professional Development candidates wishing to be considered for the award of Postgraduate Certificate must have undertaken only 6 modules from the list below and have fulfilled the requirements for Certificate outlined in 5. below. For the Diploma, candidates must have undertaken only 12 modules from the list below and have fulfilled the requirements outlined in 5. below. 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
  • The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use of models of business situations and research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;

4. Programme structure

4.1                  Compulsory Subjects  (total modular weight 30)

                                                                                                                                     Module Weight

           

BSPP01

Introduction to Automotive Retail Management

 

10

BSPP05/BSPN56

Managing Business Performance

 

 10

BSPP09/BSPN50 

Introduction to Business Planning

 

10

 

4.2                  Optional Subjects  

 

 BSPP13

Maximising Performance through people

 

10 

 BSPP17

 Creating a Marketing Plan

 

10 

 BSPP21/BSPN57

 Managing Quality

 

 10

 BSPP25

 Building Successful Teams

 

10 

 BSPP29/BSPN51

 Generating Customer Loyalty

 

 10

 BSPP33

 Creating a Business Plan

 

10 

 BSPP35/BSPN52

 

 Operations Management

10 

 BSPP36/BSPN65

 

 Management and leadership Skills

10 

 BSPP65

 Introduction to Employment Law

 

10 

 BSPP69

 Analysing and Budgeting for Your Business

 

 10

 BSPP73

 Introduction to Product and Consumer Law

 

10 

 BSPP85/BSPN58

 Improving Performance through Coaching

 

 10

 BSPP89/BSPN64

 Financial Skills for Non-Financial Managers

 

10 

 BSPP90/BSPN59

 Change Management

 

10 

 BSPP91/BSPN53

 Foundations of Management

10

 

 BSPP92/BSPN54

 Finance for Managers

10

 

 BSPP93/BSPN55

 Decisions Systems

10 

 

 BSPP94/BSPN63

 Human Resources Management

10 

 

 BSPP95/BSPN60

 Marketing Strategy

 10

 

 BSPP96/BSPN61

 Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market

10 

 

 BSPP97/BSPN62 

 Cross Cultural Market Development

10 

 

 BSP695

 Operations Management for the Accident Repair Centre

 

10 

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   

4.3                 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

 

BSP732/BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

 

15

BSP746/BSPN04 

Retail Marketing Strategy

 

15

BSP731

Project

 

30

 

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

4.4   For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1 To be eligible for the award of the Postgraduate Certificate in Automotive Retail Management, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits, comprising 30 credits from the compulsory modules listed in 4.1 and 30 credits from the optional modules in 4.2.

At the discretion of the Programme Director candidates for the Certificate may substitute for the modules listed in 4.2 any similar modules with an equivalent or greater weight from the School of Business and Economics suite of postgraduate modules.

5.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120 from the modules listed in 4.1 and 4.2.

5.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.2 and in addition must complete 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3. 

 

Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Automotive Retail Management (2014 + 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
  • Institute of the Motor Industry
  • Chartered Management Institute
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Automotive Retail Management
Programme code BSPT32
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of the MSc is thirty six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of the Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See:http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/automotiveretailmanagement/

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;

K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;

K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;

K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;

K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;

K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;

K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;

K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;

K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships;

K11. The role of digital and social media within the context of the retail automotive environment;

K12. The development of resilient and sustainable organisations within the retail automotive sector;

K13. The potential future development of the automotive industry and the role of retailing within it ;

K14. The international context in which the retail automotive sector operates;

K15. The issues of managing in a multi-cultural environment ;

K16. The knowledge of how sales and marketing activity needs to embrace international cultures.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1. Manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;

C2. Establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;

C3. Use of models of business situations and research skills;

C4. Identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;

C5. Recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;

C6. Conduct research into business and management issues;

C7. Learn through reflection on practice and experience;

C8. View the organisation from the perspective of sustainability and resilience;

C9. Recognise the management implications of different international cultures;

C10. Recognise the nuances of managing in an international context.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1. Apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;

P2. Perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;

P3. Use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;

P4. Engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;

P5. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P6. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

P7. Employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;

P8. Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;

P9. Use Social and Digital Media within the context of the retail automotive sector.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

T2. Organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T3. Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4. Listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5. Use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;

T6. Demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;

T7. Set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;

T8. Interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;

T9. Manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;

T10. Demonstrate the ability to operate appropriately in an international context.

4. Programme structure

4.1                  Compulsory Subjects  (total modular weight 60)

                                                                                                                                     Mmodule Weight

           

BSPP09/BSPN50 

Introduction to Business Planning

 

10

BSPP29/BSPN51

Generating Customer Loyalty

 

 10

BSPP35/BSPN52

Operations Management

 

10

BSPP91/BSPN53

Foundations of Management 

 

10

BSPP92/BSPN54

Finance for Managers

 

      10      

BSPP93/BSPN55

Decision Systems

 

  10   

 

4.2                  Optional Subjects   (total modular weight 60)

 

 BSPP05/BSPN56

 Managing Business Performance

10 

 BSPP21/BSPN57

 Managing Quality

10 

 BSPP36/BSPN65

 Management and Leadership Skills

10 

 BSPP85/BSPN58

 Improving Performance Through Coaching

10 

 BSPP90/BSPN59

 Change Management

10 

 BSPP94/BSPN63

 Human Resource Management

 

10

 BSPP95/BSPN60 

 Marketing Strategy

10 

 BSPP96/BSPN61

 Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market

10 

 BSPP97/BSPN62

 Cross Cultural Market Development

10 

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   

4.3                 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

 

BSP732/BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

 

15

BSP746/BSPN04

Retail Marketing Strategy

 

15

BSP738/BSPN09

Managing Enterprise and Innovation

 

15 

BSP739/BSPN10

Cross Cultural and International Management

 

15 

BSP745†/BSPN12† 

Project

 

30

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 To complete the PGCert in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 6 x 10 credit modules. To complete the PGDip in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules, 6 of which should be chosen from those offered in Section 4.2. To complete the MSc in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules and 60 credits from those offered in Section 4.3 to include BSP745/BSPN12 30 credit Project. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.

4.4   For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1 To be eligible for the award of the Postgraduate Certificate in Automotive Retail Management, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits, from the modules listed in 4.1

At the discretion of the Programme Director candidates for the Certificate may substitute for the modules listed in 4.1 with any similar modules with an equivalent or greater weight from the School of Business and Economics suite of postgraduate modules.

5.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120 from the modules listed in 4.1 and 4.2.

5.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.2 and in addition must complete 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.    Candidates who have completed BSPP96 cannot undertake BSP739.

 

Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Leadership and Management (Building Societies Association)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert (available as entry as well as exit awards)
Programme title Leadership and Management
Programme code BSPT64
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: 

 

and the following: 

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)              Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution;

Or

iii)            Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal education

 

See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the building societies sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for leadership and management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the sector.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7
  • School of Business and Economics Business Plan
  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy
  • The University academic quality procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

     K1. The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;

     K2. The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix that support organisational strategy;

     K3. Operations management of products and services to support effective and efficient resource use and process design;

     K4. The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

     K5. The characteristics of the leadership and management roles; the leadership, management and development of people within organisations; organisational behavior and culture, human resource management and leading change; managing well-being in organisations; evidence-based leadership and management;

 

Specific to PGDip/MSc:-

     K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;

     K7. Critically assess the role of leadership in decision evaluation.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

3.2 Skills  and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

    C1. manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal; recognise the need for systematic thinking and cross-functional approaches

    C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, evaluating and solving business problems;

    C3. conduct critical analyses of management research and practice; source, analyse and evaluate business-related data from a wide variety of organizational, professional and research sources;

    C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations.

Specific to PGDip/MSc:-

    C5. assess the relationship between value-focused evaluation and decision outcomes.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

 

    P1. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports; produce written communication that argues the business case, supported by valid and reliable evidence;

    P2. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

    P3. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

    P4. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills to aid decision-making;

Specific to PGDip/MSc:-

    P5. model reflexive practice such that they can teach others the benefits of goal-setting, reflection and analysis for the development of self and the business; adapt their management and leadership approach to meet the context and environment in which they operate;

    P6. perform effectively as a team leader and team member, recognising and applying each individual’s contributions, including team selection, team development, delegation, and management;

    P7. engage in oral communication that achieves objectives, including listening, negotiating, persuading and influencing.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

c. Key transferable skills:

    T1. Use a wide range of data to identify, create and evaluate options for strategic and operational decision making;

    T2. Organise and synthesis multiple forms of information to abstract meaning and share knowledge

    T3. Engagement with information technology and other forms of media to effectively communicate information;

    T4. Use of listening and negotiation skills to persuade or influence others;

    T5. Apply effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;

Specific to MSc:-

    T6. Successfully manage a project through the whole project cycle; from idea creation, planning, data collection and analysis, development of compelling recommendations and conclusions, through to final submission. 

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

 Code

 Module Title

Modular Weight

BSPH01

Financial Management

15

BSPH02

Managing and Leading People

15

BSPH03

Operations Management

15

BSPH04

Marketing Management

15

BSPH11

Information Management

15

BSPH15

Leadership and Change

15

BSPH41 Value Focused Decision Making 15
BSPH52 Strategy, Stakeholders and Governance 15
BSPA01† Masters Research Project 60

 

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

To complete the PG Cert in Leadership and Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the PG Dip in Leadership and Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Leadership and Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit research project.  Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.3  Exemptions

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 15 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Leadership and Management and the MSc in Leadership and Management. 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.1 specifically, BSPH01; BSPH02; BSPH03 and BSPH04.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the modules from 4.1 (modular weight 120, not including BSPA01).

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits module BSPA01.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Professional) (Aggregate Industries) (Sept 2013, 2014 and 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership (Professional)
Programme code BSPT62
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/management-leadership/

 

and the following: 

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are:

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

1.5         Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies (subject to the approval of the Programme Director) may count 10 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership.

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with Aggregate Industries.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management techniques, selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

4.1.1 (total modular weight 120)

BSP901

Foundations of Management Learning & Personal Development

10

BSP902

Transformational Leadership and Change Management

20

BSP903

Information & Knowledge Management

10

BSP904

Financial Management

20

BSP906

Strategic Marketing Management

20

BSP907

Strategic & Operations Management

20

BSP963

Project Management 1

10

BSP928

Project Management 2

10

  

4.2  MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

BSP763

Masters Project

60

 

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also to be eligible for the award of MSc in Management & Leadership (Professional) must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Professional) (Aggregate Industries) (Sept 2017 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership (Professional)
Programme code BSPT62
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/management-leadership/

 

and the following: 

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are:

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

1.5         Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies (subject to the approval of the Programme Director) may count 10 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership.

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with Aggregate Industries.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management techniques, selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

4.1.1 (total modular weight 120)

BSP901

Foundations of Management Learning & Personal Development

10

BSP902

Transformational Leadership and Change Management

20

BSP903

Information & Knowledge Management

10

BSP904

Accounting and Finance

20

BSP906

Strategic Marketing Management

20

BSP907

Strategic & Operations Management

20

BSP963

Project Management 1

10

BSP928

Project Management 2

10

  

4.2  MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

BSP763

Masters Project

60

 

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also to be eligible for the award of MSc in Management & Leadership (Professional) must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Management and Leadership (Public) (Sept 2013 to Aug 2015)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert
Programme title Management and Leadership
Programme code BSPT60
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementleadership/

 

and the following: 

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)              possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.

 

See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with business organisations.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
  • A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisations.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Subjects 

       4.1.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 50)

 

 

Module Weight

BSP805

Understanding Financial Information

10

BSP810

Planning

10

BSP815

Leadership and Influence

10

BSP820

Information Management 1

10

BSP825

Marketing

10

  

4.1.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 50)

BSP855

Financial Information for Managers

10

BSP860

Operations Management

10

BSP865

Leading Teams and Change

10

BSP870

Information Management 2

10

BSP875

Strategic Marketing Management

10

  

4.2 Optional Subjects

4.2.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 10)

BSP830

Sales and Marketing

10

BSP832

Retailing 1

10

BSP834

Total Quality 1

10

BSP836

Selling Skills

10

BSP838

Problem Solving and Decision Making

10

BSP840

Occupational Health & Safety Management

10

BSP842

Merchandising

10

BSP844

Effective Management in Small Firms 1

10

BSP846

Managing Small Business Growth 1

10

BSP847

Coaching for Impact 1

10

BSP885

Personnel Management 1

10

 

4.2.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 10)

BSP848

Coaching for Impact 2

10

BSP880

Retailing 2

10

BSP882

Total Quality 2

10

BSP884

Sales Management

10

BSP886

Forecasting and Decision Making

10

BSP888

Personnel Management 2

10

BSP892

New Product and Service Development

10

BSP894

Effective Management in Small Firms 2

10

BSP896

Managing Small Business Growth 2

10

  

4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)

BSP763

Masters Project

60

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available.  Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.

4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.6  Exemptions

With the permission of the Programme Director 60 credits may be obtained towards the award of Diploma on the basis of successful completion of all modules on the Postgraduate Certificate in Continuing Professional Development. 

Candidates with the award of ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Certificate in Management may count 60 credits towards the award of Diploma.

Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Diploma in Management prior to 2001 may count 100 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Diploma in Management after 2001 may count 120 credits towards the award of an MSc.

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 10 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership.  Such candidates who already hold the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate (as outlined in 1.6 above) would only be able to count an additional 10 credits to the 60 credits they already have. 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete all of the level 1 modules listed in 4.1.1 (modular weight 50 credits) and one level 1 module from those listed in 4.2.1 (modular weight 10 credits).  This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory level 1 and level 2 modules from 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 (modular weight 100), one optional level 1 module from 4.2.1 (modular weight 10) and, one optional level 2 module from 4.2.2 (modular weight 10).   This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.   The optional modules taken at level 2 should complement those taken at level 1.  

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2009- Sept 2011 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Occupational Health and Safety Management
Programme code BSPT50
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/

and also the following:

Entrance requirements to the programme:

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)               Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution.

Or

iii)              Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

 

Exemptions

Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by the:

i)          National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (National Diploma) and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or the

ii)         British Safety Council Level 6 and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

iii)        a Diploma in Occupational Safety and Health from another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health 

may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSP540–BSP544 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.

The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
  • the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • the structure and application of occupational health and safety law;
  • advanced risk assessment techniques;
  • the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;
  • the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;
  • the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;
  • establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;
  • assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;
  • critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;
  • employ qualitative and quantitative skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety-related materials including  journals,  legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules

 

 

Module Weight

BSP540

Occupational Health and Safety and the Law

15

BSP541

Risk Management

15

BSP542*

Management of Physical Hazards

15

BSP543*

Occupational Health Management

15

BSP544          

Safety and the Management of People

15

BSP545

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSP546

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSP514

Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project

60

BSP547†/BSPA01†

Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project

60

* by distance learning

partially by distance learning (>50%)

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSP540, BSP541 and two others chosen from BSP542-544.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP540-545 inclusive.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSP514 or BSP547/BSPA01.

Candidates must have also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP546 and BSP547/BSPA01.

 5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2011 to Sept 2014 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for graduate membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Occupational Health and Safety Management
Programme code BSPT50
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/

 

and  also the following:

Entrance requirements to the programme:

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent 

Or 

ii)               Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution.

Or 

iii)              Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

 

Exemptions 

Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by: 

i)          The National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (National or International Diploma) and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

ii)         The British Safety Council Level 6 Diploma, and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

iii)        another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health 

may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSP540–BSP544 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.

The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
  • the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.

The following additional reference points also provide a benchmark for programme development, delivery and content: 

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

  • the structure and application of occupational health and safety law;
  • advanced risk assessment techniques;
  • the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;
  • the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
  • the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;
  • the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;
  • establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;
  • assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;
  • critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;
  • employ qualitative and quantitative skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety-related materials including  journals,  legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  • enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

 

 

Module Weight

BSP540

Occupational Health and Safety and the Law

15

BSP541

Risk Management

15

BSP542*

Management of Physical Hazards

15

BSP543*

Occupational Health Management

15

BSP544          

Safety and the Management of People

15

BSP545

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSP546

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSP514

Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project

60

BSP547†/BSPA01†

Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project

60

 * by distance learning

partially by distance learning (>50%)

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSP540, BSP541 and two others chosen from BSP542-544.                                                 

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP540-545 inclusive.

Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSP514 or BSP547/BSPA01.

Candidates must have also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.

5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP546 and BSP547/BSPA01.

 

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2015, 2016, 2017 + 2018 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

See:  

Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for graduate membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Occupational Health and Safety Management
Programme code BSPT50
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See:

 

and  also the following:

Entrance requirements to the programme:

i)                Possession of a degree or equivalent 

Or 

ii)               Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution.

Or 

iii)              Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.

 

Exemptions 

Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by: 

i)          The National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (National or International Diploma) and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

ii)         The British Safety Council Level 6 Diploma, and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or

iii)        another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health 

may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSPR10–BSPR14 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.

The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
  • enhance the career development and employability of participants;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
  • the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.

The following additional reference points also provide a benchmark for programme development, delivery and content: 

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of

K1  the structure and application of occupational health and safety law in the United Kingdom;

K2  advanced risk assessment techniques;

K3  the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;

K4  the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;

K5  the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;

K6  the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;

 

Specific to the MSc:

K7  the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1  identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;

C2  establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;

C3  assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;

C4  critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;

C5  learn through reflection on practice and experience.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1  influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;

P2  engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;

P3  create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P4  make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;

P5  employ qualitative and quantitative skills;

P6  conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety- related materials including journals, legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1  create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

T2  scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;

T3  use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4  listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5  use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;

T6  interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;

T7  manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;

T8  enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules 

 

 

Module Weight

BSPR10

Occupational Health and Safety and the Law

15

BSPR11

Risk Management

15

BSPR12*

Management of Physical Hazards

15

BSPR13*

Occupational Health Management

15

BSPR14          

Safety and the Management of People

15

BSPR15

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSPR16

Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project

45

BSP547†

Masters Research Project

60

 * by distance learning

partially by distance learning (>50%)

To complete the PG Cert in Occupational Health and Safety Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules. To complete the PG Dip in Occupational Health and Safety Management students must complete 5 x 15 credit modules and a 45 credit practical project. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.

To complete the MSc students must complete 5 x 15 credit modules, a 45 credit practical project and a 60 credit research project.

 

4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

4.3 A study plan which governs the scheduling of the programme of study and registration periods will be established at the commencement of the programme and all students are required to act in accordance with this plan

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSPR10, BSPR11 and two others chosen from BSPR12, BSPR13 or BSPR14.                                                 

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits.  Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSPR10-15 inclusive.

5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSPA01/BSP547.

5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSPR16 and BSPA01/BSP547.

 

 

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Strategic Automotive Dealership Management (Sept 2004 to Aug 2014 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institute of the Motor Industry

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Strategic Automotive Dealership Management
Programme code BSPT30
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty three calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See; http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/strategicautomotivedealershipmanagement/

 

And the following:

Requirements are those referred to in Regulation XXI.  In addition, admission to the programme will normally be restricted to Dealer Principals and Senior Managers who have at least 5 years managerial experience, or new entrants to the automotive industry with a first degree.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and develop participants management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • develop participants’ automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to further develop their contribution towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

The programme is delivered through a combination of short lectures, individual and group exercises, workshops, and practical sessions.  The modules are highly participative encouraging students to contribute to class discussions and to share personal experiences and concerns with fellow students.  Students are also strongly encouraged to consider situations within their own work environments.

The Programme Director acts in the capacity of a personal tutor and provides students with advice and guidance on academic progress.  Further support/pastoral help is provided by support staff in the CAM team.  Students are required to work both individually and within groups for both study and assessment. A programme handbook is available to each student at the beginning of the programme.  The handbook sets out general advice on study, key regulations on assessment, programme regulations and module specifications for all modules available for study.  At each module, further information is provided including a module outline which details the lecture schedule and associated reading guidance.

Constructive criticism is provided to students on coursework assignments throughout the programme.

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

  • The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
  • The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
  • The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
  • The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
  • The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
  • The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
  • The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
  • The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
  • The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
  • The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of  automotive dealerships

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  • establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  • use of models of business situations and research skills;
  • identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  • recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  • conduct research into business and management issues;
  • learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  • apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  • perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
  • engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  • employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  • conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  • create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  • organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  • use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
  • listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
  • use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
  • demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  • set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  • interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
  • manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning

4. Programme structure

4.1 Modules (total modular weight 180)

  

 

Modular Weight

BSP730

Foundations of Management

15

BSP732/BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

15

BSP734†/BSPN02† 

Work Based Assignment 1

15

BSP736†/BSPN05†

Work Based Assignment 2

15

BSP742†/BSPN11†

Work Based Assignment 3

15

BSP743/BSPN08

Financial Management.

15

BSP744

Project

60

BSP746/BSPN04

Retail Marketing Strategy

15

BSP747/BSPN06

Strategic Human Resource Management

15

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

To complete the PG Cert in Strategic Auto Dealership Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the PG Dip in Strategic Auto Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Strategic Auto Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit project. 

4.2  The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

 

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module, see the module specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Strategic Automotive Dealership Management (Sept 2014 and 2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institute of the Motor Industry

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Strategic Automotive Dealership Management
Programme code BSPT30
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty three calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See; http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/strategicautomotivedealershipmanagement/

 

And the following:

Requirements are those referred to in Regulation XXI.  Whilst previous formal qualifications are not required, admission to the programme will normally be restricted to Dealer Principals, Senior Managers and managers aspiring to a senior role in the automotive industry. Entrants will need a minimum of 5 years managerial experience at an appropriate level.

New entrants to the automotive industry who possess a first degree (with Second Class Honours or equivalent) from a UK or recognised overseas University will also be considered.

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and develop participants management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • develop participants’ automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to further develop their contribution towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry
  • provide a global perspective on the automotive sector.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

The programme is delivered through a combination of short lectures, individual and group exercises, workshops, and practical sessions.  The modules are highly participative encouraging students to contribute to class discussions and to share personal experiences and concerns with fellow students.  Students are also strongly encouraged to consider situations within their own work environments.

The Programme Director acts in the capacity of a personal tutor and provides students with advice and guidance on academic progress.  Further support/pastoral help is provided by support staff in the CAM team.  Students are required to work both individually and within groups for both study and assessment. A programme handbook is available to each student at the beginning of the programme.  The handbook sets out general advice on study, key regulations on assessment, programme regulations and module specifications for all modules available for study.  At each module, further information is provided including a module outline which details the lecture schedule and associated reading guidance.

Constructive criticism is provided to students on coursework assignments throughout the programme.

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;

K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;

K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;

K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;

K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;

K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management and the impact of these technologies on the business.

K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;

K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;

K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of  automotive dealerships;

K11. To develop an understanding of the automotive sector on a global basis.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1. manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;

C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;

C3. use of models of business situations and research skills;

C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;

C5. recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;

C6. conduct research into business and management issues;

C7. learn through reflection on practice and experience.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1. apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;

P2. perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;

P3. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;

P4. engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;

P5. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P6. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

P7. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;

P8. conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

T2. organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T3. use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4. listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5. use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;

T6. demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;

T7. set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;

T8. interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;

T9. manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)

  

 

Modular Weight

BSP735/BSPN01

Information and Decision Systems

15

BSP732/BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

15

BSP734†/BSPN02† 

Work Based Assignment 1: Information and Decision Systems

15

BSP736†/BSPN05†

Work Based Assignment 2: Strategic Dealership Management

15

BSP742†/BSPN11†

Work Based Assignment 3: Contemporary Issues

15

BSP743/BSPN08

Financial Management.

15

BSP745†/BSPN12†

Project

30

BSP746/BSPN04

Retail Marketing Strategy

15

BSP747/BSPN06

Strategic Human Resource Management

15

BSP737/BSPN07

Leading Strategic Change

15 

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 4.2 Optional Modules (total modular weight 15 credits)

 

 

Modular Weight

BSP738/BSPN09 

Managing Enterprise and Innovation

15

BSP739/BSPN10

Cross Cultural and international Management

15

 

To complete the PG Cert in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the PG Dip in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 10 x 15 credit modules and a 30 credit project. 

 

4.3  The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

 

4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module, see the module specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Strategic Automotive Dealership Management (Sept 2016 + 2017 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

Institute of the Motor Industry

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Strategic Automotive Dealership Management
Programme code BSPT30
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty three calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

See;

 

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and develop participants management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • develop participants’ automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to further develop their contribution towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry
  • provide a global perspective on the automotive sector.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
  • Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry 

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

The programme is delivered through a combination of short lectures, individual and group exercises, workshops, and practical sessions.  The modules are highly participative encouraging students to contribute to class discussions and to share personal experiences and concerns with fellow students.  Students are also strongly encouraged to consider situations within their own work environments.

The Programme Director acts in the capacity of a personal tutor and provides students with advice and guidance on academic progress.  Further support/pastoral help is provided by support staff in the CAM team.  Students are required to work both individually and within groups for both study and assessment. A programme handbook is available to each student at the beginning of the programme.  The handbook sets out general advice on study, key regulations on assessment, programme regulations and module specifications for all modules available for study.  At each module, further information is provided including a module outline which details the lecture schedule and associated reading guidance.

Constructive criticism is provided to students on coursework assignments throughout the programme.

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;

K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;

K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;

K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;

K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;

K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management and the impact of these technologies on the business.

K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;

K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;

K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of  automotive dealerships;

K11. To develop an understanding of the automotive sector on a global basis.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

C1. manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;

C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;

C3. use of models of business situations and research skills;

C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;

C5. recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;

C6. conduct research into business and management issues;

C7. learn through reflection on practice and experience.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

P1. apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;

P2. perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;

P3. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;

P4. engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;

P5. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

P6. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

P7. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;

P8. conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

T1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

T2. organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T3. use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

T4. listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

T5. use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;

T6. demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;

T7. set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;

T8. interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;

T9. manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning

4. Programme structure

4.1 Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 180)

  

 

Modular Weight

BSPN01

Information and Decision Systems

15

BSPN03

Strategic Dealership Management

15

BSPN02† 

Work Based Assignment 1: Information and Decision Systems

15

BSPN05†

Work Based Assignment 2: Strategic Dealership Management

15

BSPN11†

Work Based Assignment 3: Contemporary Issues

15

BSPN08

Financial Management.

15

BSPN12†

Project

30

BSPN04

Retail Marketing Strategy

15

BSPN06

Strategic Human Resource Management

15

BSPN07

Leading Strategic Change

15 

BSPN66

Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market

15

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

  

To complete the PG Cert in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the PG Dip in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 10 x 15 credit modules and a 30 credit project. 

 

4.3  The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.

 

4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module, see the module specification.

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Wealth Management

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Wealth Management
Programme code BSPT17
Length of programme
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

First Degree and/or relevant professional qualifications and/or appropriate work experience 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the wealth management sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for stakeholder roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisation;
  • provide participants with the opportunity to foster participant’s understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects relevant to their organisations role within the financial services market;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • develop strategic thinking and analytical capability to support a financial services business in a consumer facing / retail context;
  • encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas: 

K1.         The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;

K2.         The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;

K3.         The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;

K4.         The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;

K5.         The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;

K6.         The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;

K7.         The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;

K8.         The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;

K9.         A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;

K10.      The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  1. manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
  2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
  3. identify and evaluate appropriate leadership styles for situations;
  4. evaluate complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
  5. learn through reflection on practice and experience.

 

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

  1. apply leadership and performance management; selecting the appropriate style for situations;
  2. engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
  3. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  4. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
  5. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
  6. conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet as well as primary research;
c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

  1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
  2. scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
  3. use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including business reports;
  4. demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
  5. set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
  6. manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
  7. enhance personal development and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.

4. Programme structure

Core Modules

Code

Module title

Modular weight

BSP970

Managing and Leading People

15

BSP973

Financial Services Environment

15

BSP974

Marketing of Financial Services

15

BSP975

Information Management

15

BSP976

Leading Successful Teams

15

BSP977

Generating Customer Loyalty

15

BSP978

Business Law and Practice

15

BSP979

Strategic Management of Business

15

BSP980

Practical Project

45

 

Optional Modules (students may select one module from) 

Code

Module title

Modular weight

BSP971

Entrepreneurship and Professional Development

15

BSP972

Financial and Performance Management

15

 

 

 

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1  In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also.

5.1.1  To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates  must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must have completed BSP970, BSP971 or BSP972, BSP973 and BSP974.

5.1.2  To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates  must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the modules outlined in 5.1.1 and BSP975, BSP976, BSP977 and BSP978.

5.1.3  To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates  must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the modules outlined in 5.1.1 and 5.1.2 and BSP979 and BSP980.

 

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Programme Specification

BS MSc Leadership and Management (Public) (2015 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert (available as entry as well as exit awards)
Programme title Leadership and Management
Programme code BSPT60
Length of programme The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

 

Entrance Requirements to the programme are: 

i)              Possession of a degree or equivalent

Or

ii)             Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution;

Or

iii)            Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal education

 

See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.

 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

The programme aims to:

  • develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
  • prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
  • enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
  • provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with business organisations.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

  • The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
  • The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7
  • School of Business and Economics Business Plan
  • ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy
  • The University academic quality procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:

     K1. The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change                  issues;

     K2. The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market                            orientation and the marketing mix that support organisational strategy;

     K3. Operations management of products and services to support effective and efficient resource use and process design;

     K4. The financing of the business enterprise:  sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and                    financial reporting applications;

     K5. The characteristics of the leadership and management roles; the leadership, management and development of people within                  organisations; organisational behavior and culture, human resource management and leading change; managing well-being in              organisations; evidence-based leadership and management;

Specific to PGDip/MSc:-

     K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

3.2 Skills  and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

    C1. manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal; recognise the           need for systematic thinking and cross-functional approaches

    C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, evaluating               and solving business problems;

    C3. conduct critical analyses of management research and practice; source, analyse and evaluate business-related data from a wide             variety of organizational, professional and research sources;

    C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:

    P1. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports; produce written communication           that argues the business case, supported by valid and reliable evidence;

    P2. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;

    P3. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;

    P4. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills to aid               decision-making;

Specific to PGDip/MSc:-

    P5. model reflexive practice such that they can teach others the benefits of goal-setting, reflection and analysis for the development             of self and the business; adapt their management and leadership approach to meet the context and environment in which they             operate;

    P6. perform effectively as a team leader and team member, recognising and applying each individual’s contributions, including team             selection, team development, delegation, and management;

    P7. engage in oral communication that achieves objectives, including listening, negotiating, persuading and influencing.

 

c. Key transferable skills:

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:

    T1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions and deliver critically evaluative reports;

    T2. scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;

    T3. use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;

    T4. listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;

    T5. use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Core Modules 

 Code

 Module Title

Modular Weight

BSPH01

Financial Management

15

BSPH02

Managing and Leading People

15

BSPH03

Operations Management

15

BSPH04

Marketing Management

15

BSPH11

Information Management and Governance

15

BSPH15

Leadership and Change

15

BSPA01† Masters Research Project 60

  

4.2 Optional Modules

BSPH10

Strategic Management

15

BSPH12

Project Management

15

BSPH13

Managing Individual and Team Performance

15

BSPH14

Management of Learning and Development

15

BSPH16

Selection and Assessment

15

BSPH17

Manager as a Coach

15

BSPH18

Coaching and Mentoring

15

BSPH19

Management of the Consultancy Process

15

BSPH20

New Product and Service Development

15

BSPH21

Occupational Health and Safety Management

15

BSPH40

Leadership Framing and Problem Solving

15

BSPH41

Value Focused Decision Making

15

BSPH42

Hidden Traps in Decision Making

15

BSPH43

Learning from Decisions Using Systems Thinking

15

BSPH30

Service Marketing

15

BSPH32

Service Operations

15

BSPH33

Service Strategy

15

BSPH34

Public Management

15

BSPH50

Innovation Management

15

BSPH51

Entrepreneurship

15

BSPH52

Strategy and Planning

15

BSPH53

Intellectual Property

15

BSPH54

Understanding Business Failure

15

BSPR02

Risk Management

15

  by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)

 

To complete the PG Cert in Leadership and Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the PG Dip in Leadership and Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules.  To complete the MSc in Leadership and Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit research project.  Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.

4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.

 

4.4  Exemptions

Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 15 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Leadership and Management and the MSc in Leadership and Management. 

  • Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
  • Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
  • Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
  • Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:

5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.1 specifically, BSPH01; BSPH02; BSPH03 and BSPH04.

5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120.  Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory modules from 4.1 (modular weight 90, not including BSPA01) and two optional modules from 4.2 (modular weight 30).

5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits module BSPA01.

 

5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

n/a

Programme Specification

BS MSc Strategic Leadership

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body

EQUIS

Accreditation 1st received: 2008

Accreditation renewal: 2017 

AACSB International

Accreditation received: 2014 

Institute for Apprenticeships  

Senior Leader Master’s Degree Apprenticeship Standard

Final award MSc/ PGDip / PGCert
Programme title Strategic Leadership
Programme code BSPTB1 Strategic Leadership; BSPTB8 Strategic Leadership (Apprenticeship); BSPTB2 Strategic Leadership (Building Societies Association Apprenticeship); BSPTB3 Strategic Leadership (Building Societies Association); BSPTB4 Strategic Leadership (Aggregates Industry Apprenticeship); BSPTB5 Strategic Leadership (Aggregates Industry); BSPTB6 Strategic Leadership (St James’s Place Wealth Management Apprenticeship); BSPTB7 Strategic Leadership (St James’s Place Wealth Management) BSPTB9 Strategic Leadership (Automotive Apprenticeship) BSPTC1 Strategic Leadership (Automotive)
Length of programme The approximate period of study for the award of MSc in Strategic Leadership is thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme.
UCAS code n/a
Admissions criteria

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

These programmes are specifically targeted at bespoke or consortium clients. Therefore, the programmes aim to support participants developing an in-depth understanding of their related sectors through drawing on sector specific and wider relevant examples and cases that support students learning and comprehension.  Clients support in the development of the bespoke/sectorial related content. 

The programme aims to:

  • Prepare participants for a career in senior management including formal governance and directorial responsibilities;
  • Provide managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of intellectual and personal development, within the context of the advanced academic study of business and management, so as to enhance their effectiveness as managers and leaders;
  • Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities, and to permit detailed study in their specific sector or context;
  • Create managers who have a range of skills and attributes particularly relevant to business and management, which equip them to be able to deal with complex business problems in an increasingly dynamic business environment;
  • Create business leaders who are responsible for direction and vision, providing a clear sense of purpose, and leading organisational change;
  • Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing engagement with practice, enabling them to ground their new knowledge within their past professional experience and apply it to new situations;
  • Develop adaptable, innovative, inclusive and ethically-minded leaders, acting as role models within their organisation, who can meet the management and professional needs of organisations in their sectorial context now and in the future;
  • Encourage enthusiasm and self-motivation, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive attitude to future developments and an openness to new ideas;
  • Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

-         The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management

-         The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications

-         Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines

-         Senior Leaders Level 7 Masters Apprenticeship Standard (IoA)

-         CMI Level 7 Diploma in Strategic Management and Leadership

-         School of Business and Economics ('The School') aims for management education within the School strategy

-         The University Academic Quality Procedures

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:

K1 ... the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;

K2 … the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;

K3 … the dynamics of organisational leadership and management - including relevant theories, models, and frameworks of effective leadership and management of organisations, focusing on the processes of decision-making in uncertainty that help them shape the future of an organisation within the business environment;

K4 … the contexts and processes in which enterprise and innovation can thrive and prosper with an emphasis on understanding, responding to and shaping the dynamic and changing nature of business; and

K5 … the interrelationships among and the integration between the areas covered in the programme and how to remove subject and functional boundaries so as to handle complex situations holistically. 

Application of Knowledge and understanding: K1, K2, K3, K5 relates to the PGCert.  K4 relates specifically to the PGDip.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1 ... use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios and transform such data and concepts into effective solutions;

C2 … analyse and appraise practical issues and problems in business and management by using or adapting the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;

C3 … use information and knowledge effectively in order to abstract meaning from information and to share knowledge, using appropriate qualitative and quantitative data analysis skills;

C4 … solve complex problems and make decisions, using logical processes, and be able to implement and review decisions. 

Application of Subject-specific cognitive skills:  C2, C3, C4 relates to PGCert. C1 relates specifically to PGDip. 

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1 ... effectively communicate with others, including networking, listening, persuasion and influencing, oral and written communication of complex ideas and arguments, using a range of media;

P2 … effectively conduct research into business and management issues, using an appropriate research design, including developing appropriate data collection, analysis and reporting methods, drawing on a range of sources of business-related materials and data, including official statistics;

P3 … select an appropriate leadership style for different situations; setting objectives, motivating, monitoring performance, coaching and mentoring; and

P4 … effectively engage with an organisation to execute a practically-based study, applying commercial acumen to produce a business report with clear, persuasive managerial conclusions. 

Application of Subject-specific practical skills:  All practical skills relate to all three levels of award.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1 ... display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;

T2 … be able to create and evaluate a range of appropriate options, being aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;

T3 … apply critical thinking and creativity to solve practical problems;

T4 … integrating knowledge from across disciplines to solve complex problems holistically;

T5 … scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;

T6 …effectively perform within team environments and be able to recognise and utilise own and other individuals’ contributions in group processes;

T7 … recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices to address ethical dilemmas;

T8 … use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;

T9 … demonstrate high personal effectiveness: critical self-awareness, self-reflection and self-management; and the ability to learn through reflection on practice and experience. 

Application of Key transferable skills:  T1, T2, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9 relates to PGCert. T3 relates specifically to the PGDip.

4. Programme structure

4.1 Content

 

 

 

BSPTB1

BSPTB8

BSPTB2

BSPTB3

BSPTB6

BSPTB7

BSPTB4 BSPTB5

BSPTB9
BSPTC1

 

 

 

Open

Cons

BSA

SJP

AI

Auto

Code

Module title

Modular weight

C/O

C/O

C/O

C/O

C/O

C/O

BSPA10

Personal Values and Effectiveness

15

C

C

C

C

C

C

BSPA12

Strategic Marketing

15

C

C

C

C

C

C

BSPA15

Information Management and Business Analytics

15

C

C

C

C

C

C

BSPA18

Strategy, Governance and Risk

15

C

C

C

C

C

C

BSPA19

Business Project

30

C

C

C

C

C

C

BSPA20

Managing Organisational Resources

30

C

C

C

C

C

C

BSPA21

Value Focused Decision Making

15

n/a

O

C

n/a

n/a

n/a

BSPA23

Customer Loyalty and Relationship Marketing

15

O

O

n/a

n/a

C

O

BSPA24

Business Law and Practice

15

n/a

O

n/a

C

n/a

n/a

BSPA25

Enterprise Challenge

15

C

C

C

C

C

n/a

BSPA26

Leading and Influencing Change

30

C

C

C

C

C

C

BSPA27

Business in Global Marketplaces

15

O

O

n/a

n/a

n/a

O

BSPA28

Managing Business Improvement

15

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

C

 To complete the full MSc programme this option requires students to undertake eight core modules equating to 165 credits one plus 15 credit optional module.  For the PGDip students would be required to complete 120 credits (6 x 15 credit modules and 1 x 30). For the PGCert students would be required to complete 60 credits (2 x 15 credit modules and 1 x 30).  The specific requirements for the PGCert and PGDip are noted in section 7 below. 

 

4.2 Optional Modules 

4.2.1    The choice of optional modules available to students on the open programme variant (BSPTB1) is limited to BSPA23 and BSPA27.  These modules will be available to every intake.  The School may choose to offer additional optional modules depending on cohort size. 

4.2.2    The choice of optional modules available to students on the consortium programme variants (BSPTB8) will be agreed with the clients as part of programme contract.  

 

4.3 Study Plan 

A study plan which governs the scheduling of the programme of study and registration periods will be established at the commencement of the programme.  Students are required to act in accordance with this plan. 

 

4.4 Degree Apprenticeships 

Students registered on Apprenticeship variants of this programme should note the additional requirements of the programme which are published at .

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also.

5.1    To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must have completed BSPA10, BSPA12 and BSPA20.

5.2    To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed the modules outlined in 7.1.1 plus BSPA15, BSPA18, BSPA25, and an additional module from those listed in 4.1 above.

5.3    To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180.  Specifically, candidates must have completed the modules outlined in 7.1.1 and 7.1.2 plus BSPA19 and BSPA26.  Students must also achieve credit in BSPA19.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

N/A

Programme Specification

BS MSc Economics & Finance (2017 entry)

Academic Year: 2018/19

This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.

This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .

This specification should be read in conjunction with:

  • Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
  • The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
  • What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
  • Summary
  • Programme aims
  • Learning outcomes
  • Programme structure
  • Progression and weighting

Programme summary

Awarding body/institution ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ
Teaching institution (if different)
Owning school/department School of Business and Economics
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body
Final award MSc
Programme title Economics and Finance
Programme code ECTP31
Length of programme The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of the MSc.
UCAS code
Admissions criteria

Full Time MSc - 

Date at which the programme specification was published

1. Programme Aims

  • To enable students to evaluate theories of economics, finance and research methods, and apply these theories. 
  • To prepare students vocationally for employment in the financial services sectors of government, commerce and industry. 
  • To equip students with appropriate tools allowing them to understand and analyse contemporary issues in economic policy. 
  • To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.

2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:

The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.

3. Programme Learning Outcomes

3.1 Knowledge and Understanding

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

K1 Critically discuss advances in core microeconomic and macroeconomic theory.

K2 Appraise either the operations of financial markets, institutions and systems around the world or core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment.

K3 Appraise the relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques necessary and select appropriately to allow for formal analysis of the above-mentioned material.

K4 Undertake independent research in economics and finance, using appropriate research tools and quantitative methods.

3.2 Skills and other attributes

a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

C1 Analyse theoretical and practical problems in economics and finance by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines.

C2 Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in economics and finance.

C3 Use the professional and academic literature in economics and finance to formulate questions suitable for empirical research

C4 Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in economics and finance.

b. Subject-specific practical skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

P1 Generate word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in economics and finance.

P2 Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.

c. Key transferable skills:

On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:

T1 Critically analyse and evaluate complex topics.

T2  Formulate key arguments from an extensive range of evidence.

T3  Demonstrate advanced skills in numeracy ( Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques).

T4  Apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations.

T5  Use advanced information technology (e.g. handling of large data sets, multifaceted information retrieval and spread-sheet methods).

T6  Demonstrate effective personal organisation including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision-making and written and oral communication.

T7  Use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management.

T8 Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines.

4. Programme structure

        

Module Structure

Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)

Code         

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP204

Economics of Firms and Markets

15

1

ECP205

Macroeconomic Policy and Financial Markets

15

1

ECP202

Financial Economics

15

1

ECP206

Economic Data Analysis

15

1

ECP200

Research Communication for Economists

10

1 &2

ECP256

Applied Financial Econometrics

15

2

ECP251

Risk Management and Derivatives

15

2

ECP255

Corporate Finance

15

2

ECP311

Financial Economics in Practice

20

3

ECP315

Economics Research Project

30

 3

Semester 2 Option Modules

In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose One optional Module (total modular weight 15).

Code

Subject Title

Modular Weight

Semester

ECP254

Banking and Financial Markets

15

2

ECP257

International Money and Finance

15

2

 

5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award

5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. 

5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period. 

5.3 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.

6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification

Weightings for the contribution to the Final Degree Classification will be consistent with the credit weighting of each module.  

Related links

Decorative

How to print a Programme Specification

1. Select programme specification
2. Save specification as a PDF
3. Print PDF